JP6736233B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type game machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

In a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine or the like, a fraudulent act in which a board called a "hanging board" is illegally installed in the gaming machine and a big hit is forcibly generated is known (for example, Patent Document 1). ..

JP, 2013-230325, A

The technique described in Patent Document 1 does not assume that a fraudulent board is installed with respect to an external connection board that is likely to be the target of fraudulent activity because the wiring for external connection is dense. There was room for improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to install an unauthorized board or circuit on an external connection board which is apt to be a target of fraudulent activity because wiring for external connection is dense. In this case, it is to provide a game machine that can easily find out that they are installed .

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine equipped with a main body frame and a game board detachable from the main body frame,
An external connection board that is connected to the outside of the gaming machine by wiring is provided in the main frame,
The main body frame is configured to include a base member formed of a transparent material,
When the game board is removed, the external connection board is visible from the front side of the game machine through the base member,
The external connection board has a terminal mounting surface to which the wiring can be connected, and a solder surface on the back surface side of the terminal mounting surface, and the solder surface is visible when viewed through the base member. Is possible,
In a state where the external connection board is visible from the front side of the gaming machine through the base member, a specific board different from the external connection board to which the ground wire for static elimination is connected can also be viewed.
The mounting angle of the external connection board and the mounting angle of the specific board are different from each other, and the external connection board and the specific board are visually recognized at different inclinations when viewed with the game board removed. Is a gaming machine characterized by.

According to the present invention, when an unauthorized board or circuit is installed on the external connection board provided on the main body frame, it is possible to easily discover that the board or circuit is installed .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of a door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing/retreating direction of the production operation section button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the front lower side. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raised position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower part. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is the rear cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 110 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 108. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a CR unit input/output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 7 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 123 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 122 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main-control side power activation of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing of FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a payout control unit main process and a payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 129. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball glide judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pay-out ball gaze operation judgment setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball-bending operation setting process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of retry operation monitoring processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judging processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of a payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (a) from a CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection abnormality determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection restoration processing. 7 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a block diagram of 2nd Embodiment which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the game machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in tabular form. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure when the some sensor signal input part each connected to each of a some magnetic detection sensor is connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor of a detection circuit part. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 4) which has arrange|positioned the detection circuit part of the magnetic sensor input circuit in the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows another example (Example 5) which has arrange|positioned the detection circuit part of the magnetic sensor input circuit in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a circuit diagram showing an example (embodiment 6) in which the avoidance unit and the detection circuit unit of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the example (Example 7) which has arrange|positioned the voltage output part of the magnetic sensor input circuit, the avoidance part, and the detection circuit part on the main control board. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing a basic configuration of electrical connection of a detection sensor section, a panel relay board, and a main control board. It is a front view which shows typically each example of the arrangement position in the game machine of a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of the avoidance part unit with respect to a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a vibration source in the gaming machine and an arrangement example of a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a block diagram showing a basic configuration of mainly electrical connection of a peripheral control board, a drive board, a drive means, and an origin position detection sensor for detecting the origin position of a movable effect body. It is a front view conceptually showing a plurality of movable accessory parts provided for the gaming machine and a grouping of the plurality of movable accessory objects. It is a timing chart which shows an example at the time of performing the recovery operation|movement to the initial position of the some movable accessory which belongs to the accessory group 01. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement|achieving the sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel is shown. It is the timing chart which shows one example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement|achieving the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure showing a relation with a game state, a reproduced sound, and a priority. It is the timing chart which shows one example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for an automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the search processing of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combinations. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction|regeneration channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of free channel search processing when performing control which outputs a sound of this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of conditions for selecting a channel for replacing sound output (stopping sound reproduction) when a channel is not empty at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of effect for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel to which each sound effect is output. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effects in the example of an effect of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the first half variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the production in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction|regeneration channel in sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the latter half of the variation of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a block diagram showing an earth system of the gaming machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit provided with the earth circuit board from diagonally backward. It is the perspective view which looked at the storage case part which stored the earth circuit board from the upper part. It is a circuit diagram of an earth circuit board. It is a figure for demonstrating the fixed aspect of a ball tank.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the elevated position, as viewed from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extends vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is formed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted and the sound is emitted to the front, so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, it is possible to entertain the player by operating the production operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640, a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to a game state.

Within the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B), a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 182.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to a game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, and a movable effect by the back effect unit 3100. It is possible to entertain the player by performing a lighting effect.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in a rear side portion of the left side surface that is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a right side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is brought into contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 contacts the horizontal fixing portion 12a with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a recessed portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left at a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 21a. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are enhanced by the recess 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 allows the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c to be inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the right end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat horizontal lower fixing portion 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d extending in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with a flat plate-like mounting portion 24a, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. The plate-like hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion which allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and the front is open, and a ball biting prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position near the rear in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recess 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 by the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface, the curtain plate rear member 43 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a which is a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side which is coincident with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 due to the game ball B staying at the site of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

The ball catching mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed to the mounting portion 44a. A first outlet 44b that is open upward at the left end of 44a, a second outlet 44c that is open upward to the right of the first outlet 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface thereof is positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an incorrect tool comes into contact with the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B easily stays on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the mounting portion 44a is discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, so as to be laterally separated from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are for contacting the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the curtain plate internal space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the side of the player). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43 a and the lower end of the connecting part 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure of the speaker is prevented from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 mounted on the upper end of the recess 11 a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30 b of the outer frame upper member 30. The lock member 52 and the mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51 are provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape, and extends upward from a front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extension portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and an edge extending from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. The horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided with a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extending from a rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the front left and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

The lock member 52, when attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, allows the lock body 52a to block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space for accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a that is behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that passes through the horizontal portion 60a in the vertical direction and through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that it rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame, the tray unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the tray unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 mounted on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view, and a speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The rear handle relay substrate 106, the door frame main relay substrate 104, and a part of the door frame sub relay substrate 105 which cover from the rear side, the door frame relay substrate cover 107, and the handle rear relay substrate 106 which covers from the rear side. The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable are provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The lower frame hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved within the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for playing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 such that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatably attached to the main frame 4, and the front surface of the main frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 106 and covers the rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The lower frame hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part on the right side in rear view of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides that form an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and a lower side that forms an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 the height of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b in which the left end side is inclined so as to slightly project forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. And a recessed portion in the vicinity of the right end in the front view from the rear surface toward the front, and an insertion concave portion 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion concave portion 101c that penetrates in the front and rear direction of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates forward and backward at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located rearward. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 penetrates the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c are aligned with the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

In addition, since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, a sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3 of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangular shape extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of a rectangular shape extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view.
The door frame sub relay board 105 is a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portions extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle post substrate 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered with the rear handle post substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay substrate cover 107, the handle rear relay substrate cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape whose front and left sides when viewed from the front are opened. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcement frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcement frame 111, which is attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114, which extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are vertically spaced apart from each other. And a hook member 116 to be hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction so that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a flat plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to a front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to these hooking members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In this door frame reinforcing unit 110, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the state of being attached to the door frame base 101 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. Then, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be vertically movable, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame to move upward are provided.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a that is square in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b that extends forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends horizontally against the urging force of the lock spring 124 downward, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located on a portion coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to open and close the lock. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 to be a regular cylinder. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened and a box-shaped game ball that closes the rear end of the front cover 141 and is opened in the front and enters from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball cover member 143 having a partition part 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b on the rear side of 141, and the game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 are rear-covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is placed on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are respectively arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240. Also, it is formed so as to close the rearward-opened portion of the upstream end side of the hollow guideway 241c from the rear side.

The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around a shaft extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bent in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction to the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extending in the front-rear direction. Of the rotary rod 143b rotatably supported on the rotary rod 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotary rod 143b, and a rotary rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball-slipping slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper bowl ball-sledding button 222 of the dish unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking section 144a faces the partition section 143a and at the same time the ball holding section 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding section 144b covers the partition section 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking section 144a, and the gaming ball B remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the side of the rod part 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) on the opposite side of the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and the ball feeding operation centering on the right end portion. It rotates so that the left end side near the crank 147 moves upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding solenoid 145 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a, which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and extends in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the side opposite to the side and rotatably supported around a shaft that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by a ball pulling member 143 pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not enter.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operating rod 143c is moved as the operation transmitting portion moves downward. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide passage 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is formed upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the power is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. It can be prevented from bouncing back at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a which is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center between a right side and a left side for a predetermined distance. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamper proof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540, and is attached to the illegal gaming ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B shot (struck) by the ball launching device 540 when an illegal act such as operating the string provided and taking the illegal game ball B into and out of the first starting opening is performed. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b by the V-shape formed by the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball passage 150a that connects the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit, A through-ball passage 150a is provided on the lower right side in a front view toward the rear, and is provided with a full-ball receiving port 150b which is capable of communicating with the full-tank guiding path of the lower full-ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a in spite of being launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front and being launched upward. The foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball) and the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c which are open toward the front near the lower right corner of the front view. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating sphere passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full-ball socket 150b and the foul-ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The movable piece 153 is a flat plate, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect, and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated to move the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be mounted on the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97 ).

The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a rod shape from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 from above. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is detached from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be detached in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally separated from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is separated left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward of the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end of the body portion 171 of the security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protruding piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

The crime prevention cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is protruded rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and a rotatably attached outer periphery on the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a which rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner member. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 in a front view and the base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state where the three grooves 181c are aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four rotary shafts (shaft members 187) and four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 are projecting rearward from a position inside the slit 182e with respect to the rotation center. Locking projection 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, and bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so that it curves inward. The second protrusion 182b is such that the portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that is most protruded from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that is most protruded in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined in a substantially straight line, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward in a round shape, and is transparent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, the tip end thereof inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the fourth protrusion 182d is used as the first protrusion 182a and the handle 182 is replaced, so that the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state, It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main components and seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to an upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is mounted to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

The production operation unit 300 includes, as the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the production operation unit cover unit 310, the operation unit base 320 housed in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light, a decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the operation operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

The entire dish unit 200 is bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged such that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion that is approximately 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the frontmost. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side becomes lower, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 201a sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

The upper plate 201 is a state in which the bottom plate is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B toward the position. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating up and down and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game ball B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the front side. The released game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100 and extends to the left and right, and an upper plate that has an upper plate 201 that is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211. The main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front portion of the dish unit base 211, and protruding forward, and attached to the right side of the attachment base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213 and an upper dish removal unit 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 on the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower portion to the left of the left-right center when viewed from the front and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch portion 211d that is cut to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of the portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c, and the front and rear on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. And an upper plate ball feeding port 211e located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212 and extending vertically.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e, and the mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and to the left of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion port 211g, which penetrates the front and rear below the plate main body and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h into which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion into which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a, which is assembled to the door frame 3, passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide passage 241b and the ball guide passage 241c of the unit 240 after removing the bowl and the cutout portion 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving opening 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges to the front rather than the center of the left and right as viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward from the most forwardly bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit 200 so that a portion of the upper plate near the right end of the upper plate body 212, which is closed at the upper end, sunk into the lower part of the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. A wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish upper right decoration board 278, the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the plate lower right decoration board 288. , And relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and then lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, display the amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or a ball lending machine. It is for deducting the amount of the game ball B rented out from the cash or the prepaid card that has been thrown in and returning it.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged to the right of the pullout button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. A return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or remaining money is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented gaming ball B is subtracted from the cash or the prepaid card loaded into the ball lending machine and the card is returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing bowl and bowl after removing bowl]
The unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate pre-ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower plate 202.

The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placing protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removal of the upper bowl is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the unit 230 before removal of the upper bowl.

The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a vertically extending cylindrical front base 231 and a front base 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the cylinder. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the vicinity of the front of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, the upper end thereof is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removal button 222, and the lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 of the upper bowl removal unit 242. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 biasing the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Equipped with.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a, which protrudes upward from a site where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and which is opened forward. A ball feed guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a position on the rear surface of the rear base 241 that is lower than the ball feed guide path 241b. And a ball pull-out guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guiding path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangle shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper tray ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl, the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 moves. Through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 is located at the upper end of the movement. Further, since the upper bowl ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition part 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in a state where the upper dish ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side through the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball removal port 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball removal guide path 241c, and then down from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

In this way, by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decor unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252 separately from each other in the left and right direction. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 280 mounted on the entire surface of the plate unit body 252 below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate plate decoration unit 275, respectively. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper side and rear side are open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to the lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear part is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom plate body 251 is inclined such that its bottom surface is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removing lid 265 of the lower dish ball removing unit 260.

The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the bottom plate body, when assembled in the plate unit 200, has a bottom surface located below the bottom plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a has a bottom plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the upper surface thereof has the lowest center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right in the upper portion, and the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the lower portion. Includes a lower front decoration portion 252b which bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c which extends rearward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the lower front decoration portion 252b. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in the shape of a box whose rear is opened, and the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the lower plate left decoration unit 280, the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower right plate decoration unit are formed on the front of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the left side upper bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front surface decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that a player's finger can be inserted therein, and is formed such that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Further, the dish unit body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower end of the front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, and a lower plate body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom face cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region that is below. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and above the handle insertion opening 252g, the lower front surface. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are at the center in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about ⅓ of the width of the plate unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .. Further, in a state where the dish decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower dish ball pulling button 263 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower dish ball punching base 261 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is placed. The bottom surface cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removing unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for making things happen.

The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that vertically penetrates the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the base 261 in the front-rear direction; a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted on the front end of the slider 262; and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit body 252, and is vertically positioned at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the lower dish ball punching base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction at a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left end side to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and on the right end side, the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball withdrawing lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit body 252. In a normal state of the lower dish ball removing unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower dish ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is substantially coincident with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When this slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removing lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole to the rear from the position of the through hole, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, so that the lower plate bowl removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pressed backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the holding of the slider 262. It Then, when the lower plate ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removing button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 has a translucent plate upper left decoration 271 that extends in the left-right direction and has a semi-cylindrical shape, and a plate upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left decoration 271. And a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper left decoration 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the plate upper left decoration 271 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate upper left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

In the state where the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a plate upper right ornament 276, and a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right ornament 276, And a plate upper right decoration board 278 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decoration body 276 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish upper right decoration body 276 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper right decoration body 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. To be The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The dish lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower left ornamental body 281 and a plate lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left ornamental body 281. A plate left lower decoration substrate 283 mounted on the rear side of the plate left lower reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulge portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The plate lower left decorative body 281 has a semi-circular curvature that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the plate lower left decorative body 281 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left edge. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end goes into the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light emission, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has a translucent lower dish right ornamental body 286, and a plate lower right dish lower portion attached to the rear side of the dish right lower ornamental body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decoration board 288 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rear center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape at the right end. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear into the plate lower right decoration body 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are full-color LEDs, and by making the LEDs emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated and decorated.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 looks like the right end of the dish lower side is embedded in the door frame 3. Since the plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower right decoration body 286, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be illuminated and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation button. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is configured with an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b arranged between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

The production operation unit 300 is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the production operation unit cover unit 310, the operation unit base 320 housed in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape having an open upper portion and a rear portion.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 which is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 which is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A plate center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear inside the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted on the plate center lower reflector 315. And a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction to the front side, and the rear side from this is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 has a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and forward below the dish central upper decorating body 312a. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is formed so that the bulging half arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a half arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) in half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration 312b extends in a semi-circular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The unit front cover 312, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a that projects further forward than a front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275, respectively, and at the same time, the plate center lower decorative body is The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the plate lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the plate center upper decorative member 312a can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted from the rear into the dish center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312. The lower plate center reflector 315 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs on the plate lower central decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the plate central lower decorative member 312b can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation section cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, which extends in a semi-circular arc shape, When the LEDs of the central upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate of the plate lower central decorative substrate 316 are made to emit light, it is possible to make the whole of them substantially uniformly light-emitting decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that projects far more forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 is formed into a box-like shape having a substantially cubic outer shape, and has a main body 321 whose upper side is open, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and is opened upward to rotatably support the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

In the gear bearing portion 325, the operation ring transmission gear can be mounted rotatably around the axis extending in the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state in which the production operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The production operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about the vertically extending axis and a plurality of bushes 333 that are attached to the ring mounting base 331 and move the rotation base 332 upward. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates the ring.

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332, and is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 forming a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operating portion 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operating portion 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light-transmitting annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring attachment base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is circumferentially spaced outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss portion 331b for protrudingly mounting the bush 333 rotatably upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions, and a circumferentially spaced outer side from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer top cover mounting portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion in a circle extends in an annular shape, and an outer lower surface portion 336a protruding from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a to the upper side and the center side in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b that are arranged on the lower side. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a tube extending downward from an inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. The cylindrical surface portion 337b and the inner cover attachment portions 337c that are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and are arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state in which they are assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are covered from the left side. 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally formed with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the speed change gear 344, and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at a constant interval. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance between them in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integer multiple with respect to the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, but one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to freely rotate the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate the rotary operation unit 302 to vibrate by causing the drive gear 343 to repeat normal rotation/reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle by the operation ring drive motor 342. it can.

Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation is performed. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotational operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 integrally rotates with the bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotary drive unit 340 is performed. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. To be

In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b is formed. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the production operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface to pass through the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331, and outside the ring forming the rotation operation section 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, the player can see the light-emitting decoration such as the LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward.

Here, the principle of the vibration speaker 354 will be briefly described. The vibration speaker 354 includes a voice coil, a magnet, a yoke, a diaphragm, and the like, like a general dynamic speaker. A magnetic circuit unit including the magnet is elastically supported inside the vibration speaker 354. When a sine wave having a predetermined frequency is input to the voice coil from the sound source IC, the voice coil is excited and the elastically supported magnetic circuit section resonates to generate vibration, which causes a vibration speaker. It is a mechanism for transmitting vibration to the outside of 354.
On the other hand, as a conventional method of generating vibration, a method of generating vibration by rotating a motor (so-called “eccentric motor”) having an eccentric weight attached to the output shaft of a cylindrical coreless motor is known. ..
Compared to this method, the method using the vibration speaker 354 has advantages that it is thin and does not occupy space, can obtain stronger vibration than the method using an eccentric motor of the same size, and has high vibration directivity. There is. In addition, the method using the eccentric motor has a merit that the output shaft has a large load and is easily broken, whereas the vibration speaker 354 has high durability.

The production operation button unit 360 is attached to the main body 321 via the leg 361b of the button unit base 361, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is transmitted from the bottom wall of the main body 321 to the button unit base. It is configured to be transmitted to the effect operation button unit 360 via the leg portion 361b of 361.
Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the main body portion 321 via the flange portion 322, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is produced from the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 via the flange portion 322. It is configured to reach the ring 330.
The main body 321 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of legs 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body 321, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is applied to the main body. It is configured to be transmitted to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 from the bottom wall of 321.
Further, the vibrations from the unit lower cover 311 and the flange portion 322 are configured to be transmitted to the unit front cover 312.

In this way, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320, and by transmitting this vibration via the operation unit base 320, it is possible to vibrate the effect operation unit 300 as a whole.

Further, the axis passing vertically through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the axis passing vertically through the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation portion 303 are the same. Since the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration in the axial direction of the axis that passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 vertically, the axis that passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the surface that forms the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are perpendicular to each other. By setting the same axis to pass, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be appropriately transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303.

Further, the axis passing vertically through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the axis passing vertically through the center of the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation portion 303 are the same. Since the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration in the axial direction of the axis that passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 vertically, the axis that passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the center of the surface that forms the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are separated. By making the axis that passes vertically the same, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be preferably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303.

Further, the vibration direction of the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 and the operation direction of the pressing operation unit 303 are configured to be parallel. In this case, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be directly transmitted to the player when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303.

The vibration speaker 354 is not attached to a member that is moved by a pressing operation by the player like the pressing operation unit 303, but is a bottom wall of the main body 321 that is not directly moved by the pressing operation by the player. On the other hand, it is attached so as to be separated from the pressing operation unit 303. Thereby, even when the player strongly operates the pressing operation unit 303 and a strong impact is transmitted to the effect operation unit 301, the vibration speaker 354 is moved by the pressing operation by the player like the pressing operation unit 303. As compared with the case where the vibration speaker 354 is mounted in a member, it is possible to suppress the impact given to the movable body such as the voice coil and the diaphragm provided inside the vibration speaker 354, and it is possible to prevent the damage.

The means for generating vibration is not limited to the vibration speaker 354. For example, even when an eccentric motor is used as the means for generating vibration, the eccentric motor is moved by a pressing operation by the player. By attaching to a part that does not exist, it is possible to prevent damage to the output shaft of the eccentric motor.

Note that the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the effect operation unit 300 as a whole through the operation unit base 320 by transmitting the generated vibration to the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320. By transmitting the vibration to the dish unit 200 to which the unit 300 is attached, the lower dish 202 of the dish decoration unit 250 of the dish unit 200 and the upper plate 201 of the dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 are installed. It may be vibrated.

In this case, when the effect operation unit 300 is vibrated as an effect in the gaming machine, vibration is generated as an effect even for a player who is not touching the effect operation unit 300 and touches the upper plate 201. Since it is possible to recognize that, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, by vibrating the upper plate 201, it becomes possible to smoothly supply the game balls B retained in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540.

Further, by vibrating the lower plate 202, the game balls B staying in the lower plate 202 can be smoothly discharged below the plate unit 200.

Although the example in which the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the entire effect operation unit 300 and further transmits the vibration to the dish unit 200 to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached, the vibration is not transmitted to the handle unit 180. It is desirable to do so. This is because the handle unit 180 vibrates, which may interfere with the operation of the handle 182 by the player.
In order to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the handle unit 180, a member that absorbs the vibration may be provided inside the handle insertion opening 252g or the magnitude of the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 may be adjusted.

Further, since the effect operation unit 300 has a gap between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the rotation operating portion 302, the effect operation unit 300 is located above the effect operating unit 300. As a foreign matter, liquids such as coffee and juice and powdery objects such as cigarette ash and dust may enter. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 may cause a malfunction, a gap between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, or a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the rotation operating portion 302. Since foreign matter may be caught in the center, malfunctions such as the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 may not move smoothly may be properly discharged. It is desirable to provide a mechanism for doing so.

Therefore, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration as an effect in the game machine, and the entire effect operation unit 300 vibrates, these foreign substances fall downward in the effect operation unit 300, and then on the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311. It is configured so that they can be collected and finally discharged to the outside from the drain hole 311a. Further, since the vibration speaker 354 is installed below the effect operation unit 300, it is possible to efficiently transmit the vibration to the unit lower cover 311 that is also installed below the effect operation unit 300. ..

The generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 is used as an effect in the gaming machine. At this time, foreign matter can be discharged at the same time, so that it is possible to cope with the entry of foreign matter without interrupting the game. Becomes In addition, as an effect in the game machine, the vibration speaker 354 causes vibration with a predetermined probability, so that foreign matter is discharged regularly, so that the effect operation unit 300 is normally operated for a long period of time. It becomes possible.

As an effect by the gaming machine, an example in which vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 has been shown, but a store clerk or a player himself who has intruded a foreign object operates the effect operation unit 301 to arbitrarily use the vibration speaker 354. It may be possible to generate vibration.
In this case, it is preferable that the vibration can be generated by the vibration speaker 354 by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-gaming in which the symbol does not change or when the power is turned on. As a result, the amount of foreign matter that has entered the production operation unit 300 is large, and the foreign matter is discharged from the drainage hole 311a more promptly than when waiting for vibration by the vibration speaker 354 to occur accidentally as an effect in the gaming machine. It becomes possible.
Further, when the vibration of the vibrating speaker 354 is arbitrarily generated by operating the effect operation unit 301, the duration of the vibrating speaker 354 is different from that of the case where the vibration of the vibrating speaker 354 is used for the effect in the gaming machine. Vibration may be generated.

On the other hand, as an effect on the gaming machine, even when the pressing operation unit 303 moves up or down or the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the foreign matter that has entered is discharged as in the case where vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. Can be urged.
Further, similarly to the case where vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, a store clerk or a player himself who has invaded a foreign object operates the effect operation unit 301 to arbitrarily raise or lower the pressing operation unit 303. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 may be rotated.
In this case, by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-gaming or turning on the power when the symbol does not change, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised or lowered, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Good. As a result, the amount of foreign matter that has entered the production operation unit 300 is large, and as a production in the gaming machine, as compared with the case where the press operation unit 303 is raised or lowered, or the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is awaited by accident. Therefore, it becomes possible to quickly discharge the foreign matter from the drain hole 311a.
Further, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated to arbitrarily raise or lower the pressing operation unit 303 and rotate the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303 is moved up or down, and the effect operation ring 330 is moved. As compared with the case where the rotation is used for the effect in the game machine, the raising and lowering or the rotation may be generated at different durations or at different speeds.

In the present embodiment, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration, it outputs a sound wave having a frequency of about 40 Hz±2 Hz, but this frequency is close to the lower limit of the human audible range. Considering the masking effect by the environmental sound such as the pachinko hall where is installed and the audible sound output from the other speaker (for example, the main body frame speaker 622) included in the game machine itself, it is not substantially recognizable by human hearing. ..

On the other hand, the vibration speaker 354 is controlled so as to emit an audible sound like a normal speaker by giving a signal from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 to output a sound wave having a higher frequency than that in the case where vibration is generated. It is also possible to do so.

In this way, the vibration speaker 354 provided in the effect operation unit 300 can output both vibration and audible sound according to the signal given from the sound source IC.

Further, by changing the amplitude of the signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the intensity of vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 can be changed.

The signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 may be supplied continuously or intermittently. For example, a continuous vibration may be generated by continuously supplying a signal for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), or a signal may be started and stopped every predetermined period (for example, 1 second). By doing so, intermittent vibration may be generated. This makes it possible to improve the interest.

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342. At this time, when vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, the operation unit base 320 is moved. The strong vibration is transmitted to the operation ring drive motor 342 through the operation ring, and the operation ring drive motor 342 may be out of step. Therefore, it is desirable that driving of the operation ring drive motor 342 and generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 be exclusively performed. For example, after the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 and then the rotation is stopped, vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, or vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 and then vibration is generated. It is preferable to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 after stopping the operation. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation ring drive motor 342 from being out of step, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the rotation control of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, by driving the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367, the pressing operation portion 303 is moved up or down. However, even when a stepping motor is adopted as the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367, the operation ring drive motor 342 is operated. Similarly to the case, it is desirable that the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 and the generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 are exclusively performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of control for raising or lowering the pressing operation unit 303.

In addition, by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-gaming or when the power is turned on when the symbol does not change, it is preferable that the vibration speaker 354 can generate the vibration transmitted to the game area 5a. Thereby, without opening the door frame 3, the game ball B is clogged between obstacle nails and obstacle nails, between obstacle nails and various types of objects (so-called “grape” state), and movable. It is possible to eliminate the state where the ball is sandwiched by the winning device (so-called "ball biting" state).

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and seen from the lower front. FIG. 62A is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation section 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical center press operation section 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation section 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation section 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference thereof is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urge the elevating base 364 upward are provided.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, an elevating cam driving gear member 370, a lower end of which is connected, and a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached to the elevating cam member 371 for elevating and lowering the elevating base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. The central button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 for urging the central button body 373 upward, and the central button body 373 are substantially the same. A central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper portion of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 configure a central pressing operation portion 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to an outer surface of the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer circumference of the central button body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and ascending/descending so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button cover 380, which is attached to the base 364 and has a central button cover 375 facing upward in the center, is provided. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 configure an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a lower surface of the pressing detection sensor 381 and the lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends abut on the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends abut on the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward due to the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c contacting the upper base 363, and a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 is movable is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The lifting cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a coupling portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a, and is connected to the lower end of the lifting cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downwardly from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371 a can guide the guide pin 364 d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at a center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, so that the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have a light-transmitting property. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the central button decoration substrate 376 are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are full-color LEDs. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can cause the peripheral decoration lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and has an annular base plate portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364, and a cylindrical shape extending upward from the inner circumference of the base plate portion 378a so that the central button main body 373 has a cylindrical shape. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer circumference. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

In the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decoration lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state in which the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lift cam member 371 is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the moving end toward the upper side by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

Therefore, when assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 exceeds the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is pressed. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially matching the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the up-and-down cam drive is performed via the driven gear 369 meshed with the up-and-down drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the state of the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. Further, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is projected higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being largely protruded from the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 attach the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is apart from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

Thus, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating spring 368 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 stops moving downward and the guide pin 364d moves the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 by the button lifting drive motor 367, the original lowered position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation part relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted in the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the up-down detection sensor 382 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the dish unit in a normal state, FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing force of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. And 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined such that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 projects slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly projects upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 in the counterclockwise direction in left side view, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a left side view through the operation ring transmission gear 350 to rotate. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in a left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is greater than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. When the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation section 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavy or to give a click feeling.

The rotary operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by a player's hand. ..

As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to do and operate the rotation operation unit 302. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Since the lower surface side of the rotating operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs that are arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal operation state, in the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65( a ), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation part 302 can be rotated and the central pressing operation part 303a of the pressing operation part 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and press detection is performed. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 comes off from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above and above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b serve as the rotation operating portion 302. The height is almost the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to make the player participation type production more enjoyable.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the push operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players may find it easier to perform a rotating operation with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be a hindrance to the rotational operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decoration board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402, The door frame left side decoration body 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decoration substrate 402 can cause the door frame left side decoration body 404 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating therethrough in the position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 Door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of light emitting side window decorations 410b arranged inside the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see inside the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player who is playing on the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and it is possible to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b that are attached to the front surface, extend in a cylindrical shape forward, and are vertically arranged in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs of the side window decoration part 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in a portion corresponding to the window decoration part 410b and a plurality of side window decoration members 412 are provided. The interior reflectors 414 are inserted into the interior decorations 410b of the side windows.

The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window decoration member 412 and extends vertically. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416 and the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is a flat plate in the up and down direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side inner panel 417 that has a through-hole 417a that extends in the left-right direction and penetrates in the left-right direction to form the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decoration board 418 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (in this case, three) side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-like cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decoration member 412 in the side window is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 at a position on the upper side from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The side window decoration member 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

The decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the decoration member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the side window decoration portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, that is, upper, lower, left and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then rearward from the upper end toward the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 has a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically elongated elliptical shape, and is connected to the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right side of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It appears to be embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion thereof projects from the top to the front, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction inside the side window 410a, and makes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 emit light. Thus, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that causes the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light is turned off. It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily operated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the whole of the game area 5a difficult for a player to see, and to make it difficult for a player to feel as if being seen by another player so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Furthermore, when the three LEDs on the side window interior decoration part 410b are caused to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzle, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a cylindrical shape, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial shape. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on playing games and to prevent feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, making games more enjoyable by dedicating players to playing games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and covers the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. , And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456, which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. I have it.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A bottom lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left-right direction, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protrusion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101, and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed to have a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451b. At the front end of the top top cover 452, the center in the left-right direction protrudes most forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the top surface, which is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower ends of the door frame top decorations 453 and the lower ends of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decoration board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can cause the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 each extend in the left-right direction, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating forward and backward are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top center speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sound such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, and a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the drawing, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is decorated with light. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction, and coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter upper decoration body 312a and lower-plate middle decoration body 312b are mounted vertically separated from each other and Door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. The door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b, and the rotation operation part 302 and the outer periphery are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be conspicuous.

In addition, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the plate lower center decoration 312b arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a are The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is made slightly thin, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, it becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation part 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player is performed. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easily visible, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, so that the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to make the player immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected farther forward than the upper dish 201, and at the same time, the dish center is raised. Since the decorative body 312a and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operating unit 302, the dish central upper decorative body 312a, and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are made to stand out significantly. At the same time, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used for the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached, Main body lower hinge assembly in which the base unit 500 is attached to the lower end on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 which is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500 so that a game is played within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, a reverse L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides a main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape extending left and right and is opened upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is spaced apart from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and the ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward is provided, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a removable manner. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a having a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and a total height of about 3/4 from a position slightly lower than an upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b which penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 on which the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed is placed. It is provided with a placing portion 501c, and a game board regulating portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and that restricts the lower end of the game board 5 from moving leftward, rightward, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f which penetrates the front and rear on the right side of the front part of the portion 501e when the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and rear of the gaming board mounting portion 501c which penetrates the front and back on the lower left side in the front view. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end when viewed from the front, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

On the main body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a extending leftward and rightward, protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the front and rear ends of the guide main body 502a that penetrate through the front and rear and And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than a length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state where the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at the upper and lower end sides of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and in the state where the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are rearward. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (desirably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent abnormalities from occurring.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the leading end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. An angle at which a tangent line to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The body frame upper hinge member 510 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main frame upper frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the front view in a horizontally extending portion and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an upper distance from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and also has a lower portion. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the hammer 543, a firing solenoid 542 having a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends through the firing base 541 and extending forward, a batting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, A launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll is provided.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is operated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

Note that, due to the hitting strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach within the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with a width in the front-rear direction being substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in front view that is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extending downward downward, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. From above to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a back plate upper part 551d, and from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right side and extending to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. The bottom plate portion 551g extends to a position substantially the same as the right side of the left back plate 551e, and the connecting plate portion 551h connects the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and the inside of the L shape.

As for the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recess-shaped portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing portion 551 is provided at that portion. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

The dispensing base unit 550 is mounted on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is opened upward. A tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward, is provided.

[Countermeasures against electrostatic noise]
By the way, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of control boards including a main control board 1310 are mounted, and game control, performance control, by cooperation of the control boards via commands output from the main control board 1310, Various controls such as payout control are performed. Since a large number of electronic components such as a CPU, which are easily affected by electromagnetic noise, are mounted on these control boards, how to eliminate the effect of electromagnetic noise in order to guarantee stable game operation without malfunction. Is very important.

There are various possible sources of this electromagnetic noise, but the noise source that is peculiar to a gaming machine that uses the gaming ball as a game medium, such as a ball game machine, and has the greatest influence is the gaming ball. That is, the game balls are supplied to the ball tank 552 from above each gaming machine by the gaming island facility, are used for the game in the gaming machine, and are then collected again on the gaming island. Static electricity is generated by friction between the game balls, friction between the game balls and the passage walls, and the like. Then, the electromagnetic noise is generated by the discharge from the charged game ball, which adversely affects the electronic parts such as the CPU.

As described above, the ball tank 552 is where the most game balls, which are noise sources, are supplied and concentrated. Next is the tank rail 553 that guides the game balls from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580. That is, it is considered that the amount of static electricity accumulated in the ball tank 552 is the largest. Therefore, it is considered to be a good idea to eliminate static electricity in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552. In addition, in order to realize a more stable game operation, in addition to measures to suppress the generation of electromagnetic noise due to such instantaneous discharge of static electricity, even if electromagnetic noise is generated Measures that can eliminate the adverse effects of

In the conventional gaming machine, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-120593 (Paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69), regarding the static elimination of the game balls thrown into the ball tank 552, The ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside through the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 through the grounding metal fitting 782, although detailed illustration is omitted. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the charged static electricity.”, the communication with the CR unit 6 is performed. To facilitate supply of the power supply AC24V, which is the power supply for communication, the respective grounds are once aggregated in the power supply board 630 (see FIG. 95) arranged on the CR unit 6 side under the main body frame 4 of the gaming machine, and the power supply board 630 is provided. Was connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility via the.

FIG. 202(a) is a block diagram showing a ground system of a conventional game machine showing this aspect. As shown in FIG. 202(a), conventionally, static electricity generated at various places such as a ball tank 552, various control boards represented by the main control board 1310, an interface board 635 for interfacing with the CR unit 6, etc. The power source boards 630 were once aggregated, and were connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility through the power source boards 630 to be grounded.

Since the power supply board 630 is generally heavy, it is often arranged in the lower portion of the game machine. Therefore, in order to collect them in the ground power supply board 630, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank 552 or the payout device 580 at the upper part of the gaming machine toward the power supply board 630 below. By routing the ground wire in this manner, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way and may have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is integrated in the power supply board 630, if any problem occurs in the power supply board 630, the ground is affected, or conversely, a current flows in the ground wire, which affects the operation of the power supply board 630. There was a risk of giving. Further, when the ground of the island equipment is located above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to draw the ground wires gathered by the power supply board 630 from the lower side to the upper side again.

Therefore, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, the ball tank 552 that is supplied with the most game balls and generates the most static electricity is grounded without the power supply board 630. Further, in order to quickly eliminate the charge, the ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin (for example, a resin obtained by increasing the content of a conductive filler mixed with an ABS resin), and the ball tank 552 has been conventionally generated. Where the static electricity was connected to the ground through the tank rail or the like, the ball tank 552 is directly connected to the ground. Then, an earth circuit board 559, which exhibits static elimination action, is arranged in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to accumulate, separately from the power supply board 630, and the ball tank 552 and the earth circuit board 559 are connected by an earth wire. Further, the earth circuit board 559 is connected to the earth 6000 of the island facility.

202(b) is a block diagram showing the ground system of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202(b), not only the ball tank 552 but also the interface circuit board 635 that interfaces with the CR unit 6, the power supply circuit board 630, and the like, static electricity generated at various places are once collected in the ground circuit board 559, and the ground circuit 559 is collected. It was connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility through the substrate 559 and grounded. In this way, the earth circuit board 559 plays the role of once collecting the static electricity generated at various places. In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635, the power supply board 630, and the like are directly connected to the ground circuit board 559. The tank rail 553 that guides the game balls is made of a transparent non-conductive resin, but it may be electrically conductive and integrated with the ball tank 552 to have electrical conductivity. In this case, it is possible to provide conductivity by providing a metal plate inside, as is conventionally done. Further, although it is possible to take the ground from the ball guiding unit 570 as well, with such a configuration, the ground path from the ball tank 552 and a plurality of paths of the ball guiding unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552. Since there is a possibility that interference will occur between the two because it is formed, it is desirable to ground at a suitable point from a single point.

Then, the earth metal fittings can be connected to a plurality of places such as the side surface or the rear surface of the ball tank 552. What happens is that the supply (drop) position of the game balls to the ball tank 552 varies depending on the island equipment installed on the side of the game arcade, so it is necessary to connect the ground wire for electrical connection. It is possible to change the position to a position closer to it. The mounting position of the ground metal fitting is appropriately selected in the ball tank 552 and is arbitrarily mounted. Then, the earth circuit board 559, which exerts the static elimination action, is arranged in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to be accumulated.

FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the payout base unit 550 provided with the ground circuit board 559 for performing charge removal, as viewed from diagonally behind the main body frame 4. Also, FIG. 204 is a rear view of the storage case portion 551j accommodating the ground circuit board 559 seen through from above, and FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. Further, FIG. 206 is an enlarged view of a main part mainly showing the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 203, the payout base 551 is made to be transparent, and the payout base unit 550 is located on the right side of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551 and is a tank rail. A case portion 558a, in which the circuit portions of the external terminal board 558 formed of a transparent resin case that can be visually recognized from the outside are collected, is arranged above 553, and the circuit portion of the external terminal board 558 (for example, a terminal portion). Both the board rear surface) and the connecting portion of the external terminal board 558 to the outside are visible from the outside. In this example, the external terminal board 558 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and its long sides are arranged along the left-right direction of the body frame 4. Further, in this example, the short side of the external terminal plate 558 is arranged along the vertical direction of the main body frame 4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the short side of the external terminal plate 558 is arranged with respect to the vertical direction of the main body frame 4. It may be inclined and arranged. An external terminal board 558 (connecting portion) is arranged on the rear surface of the case portion 558a.

Further, above the inside of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558, a thin box-shaped storage case portion 551j made of transparent resin whose inside is visible is disposed, and the inside of the storage case portion 551j is subjected to static elimination. A ground circuit board 559 for storing is stored with the back surface (solder surface) facing upward. Therefore, not only the connecting portion of the external terminal board 558 but also the terminal board rear surface of the external terminal board 558 and the rear surface of the ground circuit board 559 and the connector portion described later are provided so as to be easily visible from the outside. In this example, the case is made visible from the outside by a transparent resin case. However, the case is not limited to this, and a hole portion (for example, a slit or a groove hole) that opens in the case portion that is not transparent may be used. In addition to the connection portion of the external terminal plate 558 from the hole, the rear surface of the terminal plate of the external terminal plate 558 and the rear surface of the ground circuit board 559 and a connector portion described later are both easily visible from the outside. Good.
Further, if the payout base 551 is also made of a transparent resin, the back surface (solder surface) of the external terminal board 558 can be visually recognized from the inside by removing the game board. The storage case portion 551j may be formed separately or integrally with the dispensing base 551.

Since the earth circuit board 559 is provided at such a position, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, the gaming board is simply removed to remove the payout base unit 550 and the external parts included therein. The terminal board 558 and the ground circuit board 559 can be visually recognized. At that time, the external terminal board 558 and the earth circuit board 559 are located near the upper left when viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, and therefore, it is necessary to open the door largely when attempting to conduct a dishonest act. In addition, it becomes difficult to attach an unauthorized electric element to the ground circuit board 559 or the like, and even if it is performed, it becomes easy to discover that an unauthorized act is being performed from the outside.

[Fixing Mode of Ball Tank 552]
The fixing mode of the ball tank 552 in this example will be described based on FIG. 206. The ball tank 552 is attached to the left side of the rear surface of the upper portion of the transparent dispensing base 551 when viewed from the rear by means of screws. In this example, laterally projecting mounting portions 552a and 552b are formed on the left and right sides of the upper portion of the front portion of the ball tank 552 that comes into contact with the mounting surface of the dispensing base 551. Then, from the back of the main body frame 4, screws are fixed to the payout base 551 with respect to the mounting portions 552a and 552b, respectively.

Further, the ball tank 552 includes a mounting portion 552c formed by a boss projectingly formed substantially at the center of the outer surface of the ball tank 552, and a boss portion projecting side by side in the front-rear direction at the rear part of the right side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the rear. The tank rail 553 has a mounting portion 552d and a grounding metal mounting portion 552e.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the attaching portions 552c and 552d of the ball tank 552 by screws from below. Further, in the present example, a grounding metal fitting connected to one end of a grounding wire 5591 (see FIG. 204) is screwed to the mounting portion 552e of the ball tank from below by a metal screw (not shown).

[Attachment mode of the grounding fitting in the ball tank 552]
In this example, the mounting portion 552e of the ground metal fitting of the ball tank 552 is provided exclusively for the other mounting portions, but the mounting portion is not necessarily limited to the independent mounting. It is also possible to share it with the mounting part of. Each example is given below.

For example, in the case where the supply points of the game balls from the island facilities installed on the game center side are concentrated on the left side inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the game machine 1 in FIG. , The static electricity is most likely to be accumulated on the left side of the ball tank 552 in the vicinity of the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, a metal screw may be attached to the mounting portion 552a to fasten the earth metal fitting to the dispensing base 551 together.

Further, for example, the supply points of the game balls from the island facility installed on the game hall side are concentrated in the central portion inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view showing the rear side of the game machine 1 in FIG. 206. In this case, static electricity is most likely to be accumulated in the central portion of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, a ground screw may be fastened together with the tank rail 553 from below with a metal screw on the mounting portion 552c.

Further, for example, in the case where the supply points of the game balls from the island facility installed on the game center side are concentrated on the right side of the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the game machine 1 in FIG. , Static electricity is most likely to be accumulated on the right side of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In addition to the place where the game balls enter, on the right side of the ball tank 552, a large number of game balls charged with static electricity may be collected, and static electricity may easily accumulate. Further, the tank rail 553 has the ball rectifying member 556 that aligns the game balls in a line so as not to vertically overlap with each other, so that the game balls are easily stopped. In such a case, the metal fitting may be screwed to the mounting portion 552d together with the tank rail 553 together from below.

FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the storage case portion 551j of the payout base unit 550 provided with the ground circuit board 559 for performing charge removal, as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 204, the ground circuit board 559 includes five connectors CN11 to CN15. More specifically, one end of a ground wire 5591 for static elimination, one end of which is connected to a ball tank 552 made of a conductive resin, is connected to the connector CN13. It should be noted that a plurality of boss portions for ground connection are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ball tank 552 so as to be able to cope with a change in the arrangement configuration due to an increase in each of the main production devices provided in the lower portion of the ball tank 552. Often, in order to cope with the cause of static electricity generation, it is desirable that the respective boss portions for ground connection be provided in a state of being separated from each other.

In addition, the other end of the ground wire 5592 for static elimination whose one end is connected to the main body frame metal member provided on the main body frame 4 is connected to the connector CN14. It is also possible to connect the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 with a grounding metal fitting for grounding, and separately provide a connector CN16 (not shown) on the ground circuit board to provide a ground connection terminal. In this case, as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 205 described later, it may be connected in parallel to CN13 and CN14.

Further, one end of the ground wire 5593 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the connector CN15. Further, the other end of the ground wire 5595 having one end connected to the frame ground of the interface board 635 is connected to the connector CN11. The frame ground of the interface board 635 is electrically connected to the housing (frame) in which the CR unit 6 is housed through a predetermined wiring, and noise current from the housing in which the CR unit 6 is housed is detected. Is connected to the earth circuit board 559 through the frame ground of the interface board 635 and the earth wire 5595. One end of a ground wire 5594 is connected to the connector CN12. Then, by connecting the other end of the ground wire 5594 to the ground prepared in the island facility (gaming machine facility) in which the gaming machine 1 is installed, the entire gaming machine is grounded.

FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. One end of a ground resistor ER1 is connected to one end of a connection line from the connector CN13 to which a ground line 5591 connected to the ball tank 552 is connected. Further, one end of the earth resistor ER2 is also connected to one end of a connection line from the connector CN14 to which the earth line 5592 connected to the body frame metal member provided in the body frame 4 is connected. That is, by electrically connecting to a portion where static electricity is accumulated through a grounding resistor ER1 (in this example, a resistance value of 510Ω), the static electricity is gradually introduced to the ground of the gaming machine equipment, and gradually discharged. It suppresses the instantaneous discharge of static electricity.

Further, the other end of the earth resistor ER1 and the other end of the earth resistor ER2 are connected, the latter stage of the connection point on the side of the earth resistor ER1 is branched into two, and the branched one is connected to the connector CN15 (power supply board). The other branched one is connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment). The subsequent stage of the connection point on the side of the earth resistance ER2 is connected to the connector CN11 (interface board).

Since the noise current flowing from the CR unit 6 to the interface board 635 through the housing in which the CR unit 6 is housed is small, the ground wire 5595 is thinner than the other ground wires 5591 to 5594. Therefore, the connector CN11 for connecting the ground wire 5595 is also smaller than other connectors (see FIG. 204).

As described above, the grounding circuit board 559 having the grounding resistances ER1 and ER2 is provided inside the storage case portion 551j, and one end of the grounding resistance ER1 provided on the grounding circuit board 559 is connected to the ball tank 552. The wires are connected to suppress the instantaneous discharge of high voltage that causes electromagnetic noise through the earth resistance ER1. Further, the ground wire connected to the body frame metal member of the body frame 4 is connected to one end of the earth resistor ER2 so as to suppress the instantaneous discharge of high voltage which causes electromagnetic wave noise via the earth resistor ER2. ing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 205, static electricity at various points is connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment) at one point so that static electricity can be released in one system. For example, it is possible to take the ground wire from the ball tank 552 and simultaneously take the ground wire from the ball guiding unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552. In that case, the ball tank 552 generates the ground wire. Since the static electricity is divided into two systems, that is, the system directly connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment) and the system connected via the ball guiding unit 570, the static elimination by each path interferes with each other and grounding can be done well. It may disappear.

Further, since the static electricity generated at various places is once concentrated on the ground circuit board 559 arranged on the upper surface of the back surface of the body frame 4, once the static electricity is once generated on the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower surface of the back surface of the body frame 4. It is easier to route the ground wiring than the ones that are aggregated.

Since the earth circuit board 559 and the external terminal board 558 are brought close to each other and both of them are arranged on the right side of the upper part of the body frame 4 when viewed from the back surface, the earth wire 5594 from the earth circuit board 559 is connected to the earth 6000 of the island facility. It becomes easy to simultaneously perform the connection and the connection of the output wiring from the external terminal board 558 with the island facility, and the workability is improved.

Then, the ground wire 5594 (see FIG. 204) is connected to the other ends of the ground resistance ER1 and the ground resistance ER2 toward the gaming machine equipment, and the ground wire 5594 is further drawn from the rear surface of the storage case portion 551j to the outside. The ground wire 5594 that has been pulled out is connected to the ground provided in the game hall facility, so that the entire gaming machine is grounded. In this way, the length of the ground wire 5591 that connects the ball tank 552 where static electricity is likely to accumulate and the ground circuit board 559 that exhibits static elimination action is configured to be shorter than the other ground wires.

In addition, since the respective ground wires are collected on the ground circuit board 559 and the ground wire 5594 drawn out from the connector CN12 (island equipment) of the ground circuit board 559 is directly connected to the ground 6000 of the island equipment, the power supply board 630 is connected. Can be grounded without passing through. Therefore, even if some problem occurs in the power supply board 630, it is possible to reduce the influence on the ground. On the contrary, conventionally, since the grounding is performed via the power supply board 630, there is a possibility that the operation of the power supply board 630 may be affected when a large amount of current flows in the ground wire. Such a fear can be avoided by grounding without the power supply board 630.

In the embodiment, the ground resistance is provided between the connector CN13 (ball tank) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) and between the connector CN14 (body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) of the ground circuit board 559, respectively. Although ER1 and ER2 are provided, it is not always necessary to provide a ground resistance. The grounding resistance is provided to prevent a rapid current flow during grounding, so it may be provided according to the predicted generated voltage. If necessary, the connector CN11 (interface board), the connector CN12 (island) It is also possible to provide a resistor having an appropriate resistance value in the equipment) and the connector CN15 (power supply board). In addition, a ground resistance of an appropriate size may be provided in front of the connector CN12 (island equipment) so that the static electricity generated in each part can be used as a common resistance for grounding. It is also possible to perform grounding with an appropriate amount of current without adjusting the grounding resistance by adjusting.

The earth circuit board 559 is housed inside the housing case portion 551j with the back surface (solder surface) of the board facing upward, and is arranged so as to be visible from the outside of the payout unit base 550. Therefore, even if an unauthorized electric element is attached to the ground circuit board 559, it can be immediately found by visual inspection. Further, on the lower surface of the board, between the connector CN13 (ball tank) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) of the ground circuit board 559, and between the connector CN14 (body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island equipment). Earth resistors ER1 and ER2 are provided between the respective connections, and these are also attached so as to be visible from the outside. Further, in order to prepare for an unexpected situation such as loosening of the connector, the storage case portion 551j may be removable from the dispensing unit base 550, and the ground circuit board 559 may be removable from the storage case portion 551j.

Further, hook portions (for example, hooks) for hooking the ground wire are provided at a plurality of locations on the outer surface of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558, and the ground wire is hooked on these hook portions, and then the ground circuit board 559 is provided. The ground wire may be connected to the connector. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the ground wire itself due to the weight of the ground wire and the influence on the connector due to the fluctuation when the ground wire comes into contact with another member, and to stabilize the connection.

Since the ball tank 552 is made of resin, as shown in FIG. 77 and FIG. 80, the game ball is stored in the ball tank 552, or the ball collides from the upper part, so that the bottom part of the ball tank 552 is collided. When the ball tank 552 bends and the bottom portion of the ball tank 552 bends, the ball tank 552 does not come into contact with the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551. A gap is formed to the extent that it can be avoided. Further, by providing the gap, the impact when the game ball is thrown into the ball tank 552 from the island facility is not transmitted to the members thereunder.
Furthermore, in the ball tank 552, when grounding from the mounting portion 552a provided on the left side and connecting to the ground circuit board 559, the ground wire connecting the mounting portion 552a and the ground circuit board 559 is connected to this space. It is good to configure so that it can be passed using.

Further, as shown in the perspective view of FIG. 12, in a state where the game board 5 is fitted and mounted in the main body frame 4, the peripheral control unit 1500 is located below the ball tank 552. Since the peripheral control unit 1500 has an electric drive source for driving the liquid crystal display device 1600 and other movable movable parts for performance, it is easy to generate heat. Therefore, a flame-retardant polycarbonate resin (transparent or black) is used for the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. By making the peripheral control board box 1520 made of resin, there is an effect that the peripheral control board box 1520 can be made lighter in weight than the peripheral control board box 1520 made of metal.

The peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is a conductive resin having a lower electrical resistance than the ABS resin forming the ball tank 552, that is, polycarbonate (by adjusting the content of the conductive filler to be high). Can be realized, for example, by increasing the amount of carbon contained). That is, the conductivity of the peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is higher than that of the ball tank 552. The peripheral control board box 1520 may be made of metal. This is because the peripheral control board 1510 that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to static electricity is housed inside.

The peripheral control board box 1520 is also connected to the ground circuit board 559 by a ground wire via a grounding metal fitting (not shown) and finally connected to the ground circuit board 559 by a ground wire 5592. ing. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to suppress the electromagnetic wave noise generated by the discharge of static electricity, and to remove the static electricity immediately so as to be less susceptible to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise. Further, as a result, since polycarbonate is resistant to high heat, it is possible to prevent the effect of heat transfer from being exerted on main control unit 1300 arranged below polycarbonate due to its self-extinguishing property (resistant to high temperature).

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a contact pressing portion that abuts and presses a ball supply lever that operates in a direction to open the game ball on the island facility side in a direction to supply the ball tank 552 Is formed on the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552. In this example, an outwardly projecting protrusion is provided on the upper edge of the peripheral wall portion forming the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552 (see the side portion and the rear portion of the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 80). ). Therefore, the impact when the ball tank 552 hits the ball supply lever can be absorbed to some extent.

In addition, the payout base unit 550 is installed on the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being spaced apart from the first rail cover 554, which is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and leftward from the first rail cover 554 in a front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end becomes lower at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B which is circulating in two stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying it so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, inside the tank rail 553. Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side on the downstream side. The ball stop member 557 is arranged inside the recess (not shown) formed in the dispensing base 551 and does not project rearward as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball stopper member 557 from being inadvertently contacted and caught.

As described above, the payout base unit 550 further includes the external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. 88A is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the rear. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached to the upper rear surface of the back plate left part 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guide unit 570 has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that has a guide path 570a extending in a meandering shape through which the game ball B can flow, and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guide unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide the guide path. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while repeatedly folding back over the width of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, and is not protruding. Becomes

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side.

The payout device 580 is a box-shaped open to the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583; , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably mounted between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. The ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing path 580a by the lid 582, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-removing path 580b is closed. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball removing lever 593 that is slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near a right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so that it gradually moves to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right widths and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer circumference of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

The ball drop passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout passage movable piece 592 is attached in the part where the payout passage 580a and the discharge passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about 1/3 from above to the right side in rear view. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-removing movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a part of the payout device body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout vane 589 is provided with three vane pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in a portion that extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left side near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

When the ball-removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, has a ball-removing movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payoff blade 589 for suppressing the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is more than the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down soon.

Thus, in the state in which the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-removing passage 580b, so the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the game ball vigorously, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and breakage of the piece 592.

From this, since it is possible to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus the pachinko machine. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the gap is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball movable piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 and a box-shaped upper front full base 601 that is attached to the rear side and has an open front side. Of the upper full tank cover 602, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in a front view and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

In addition, the upper tank ball path unit 600 is open upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends about 3/4 of the overall width to the right in front view and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper tank discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball-removing passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are sequentially arranged and open downward from the left side in a front view. In the state where the upper full-ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens immediately below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 which can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are attached. A biasing closing spring 614.

In the lower tank full ball path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower tank full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are lined up in order from the left as viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball drop passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 as the front view, and the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening/closing contact part 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank ball passage unit 610, when assembled to the payout unit 560, has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, respectively. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

Further, the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613. Rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 that is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied/stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it is understood that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction in the rear view, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B discharged from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball receiving path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side are reached. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-ball path unit 600 which is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. While the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the front, when the game balls B are further dispensed, the lower plates are The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detected state.

When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding part 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving part 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the outside of the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine taken along the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 501 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically near the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends diagonally downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened to the front, and a portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 projects most to the rear, and the rearward is stepwise toward the right when viewed from the front. Are formed so as to have a small protrusion. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front in the speaker cover 621. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43 a so that the connecting portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is provided. The space and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, an enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portions 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connecting cylinder portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer band assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the low frequency range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 by being resonated and amplified by passing the two port members 47.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in the state in which the phase is inverted, so that the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is transmitted to the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives the game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 that is open upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball drop guide 627 and the discharge ball receiver 628 is discharged downward.

An upstream end of the ball drop guiding part 627 is opened to the left at the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end is opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving part 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball drop guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end thereof coincides with the downstream end opening. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long in the left and right directions. The bottom end of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 in front view, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guiding unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632. 97)). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board or the like of the game board 5. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost of the body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the side of the main body frame 4) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to a rear end of the main body frame base 501 extending in the vertical direction at a rear end thereof so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the payout base 551 is assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating forward and backward and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

In addition, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the locking unit 650 assembled in the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, whereby a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, it is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and whose outer shape is a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and defines the rear end of the game region 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown). Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and the game is mounted by mounting the game ball B on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling the contents.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003. The game ball B is provided with a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in either of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200, which has two general winning openings 2001 and is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and the starting at the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 mounted on the right side of the mouth unit 2100 in a front view and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005, a starting opening unit 2100, and Above the side unit 2200, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided which is attached to the game area 5a at a position slightly above the center in front view.

The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a rear box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back relay box 3010. And a plurality of back production units 3100 that are installed.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in the front view, and extends in an arc shape along a clockwise circumferential direction, and extends to an upper right diagonal position after passing through a center upper end in the left and right direction in front view. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to a diagonally upper left in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stopper 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. The backflow preventing member is rotated only in the open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is rotated and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer side of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 matches the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 penetrate the lower full tank ball. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel panel 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recessed portion 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the inside has a through hole 1121 which penetrates in the front-rear direction with a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. Equipped with.

The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface. The discharge portion 1201 formed in the above can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrent to the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310, via the panel relay board 3031, the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the starting opening solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the general winning opening. The sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 99, displays a status indicator 1401 including three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result selected by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display 1402 composed of two LEDs and a normal reservation display 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting mouth 2002, and the first starting mouth A first special reserved number indicator 1405 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. A second special symbol display 1406 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result, and a second special reservation number display 1407 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. And are equipped with.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. The display device 1408 is provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, and the like of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the effect presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102), and the peripheral control board containing the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image. ing.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box at the substantially center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. This effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, has two fixing grooves 3010c open to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is opened. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end partially penetrates the opening 1112. It projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B hit in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 or the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. The special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in either of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B.

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and in the lower part of the vertical center. The second starting port 2004 is arranged immediately below the gate unit 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction.

The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001 and a first starting port 2002, and a starting port. The unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front side of the unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the side unit 2200 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the right side of the front side. An attacker unit 2400 having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached in the approximate center of the game area 5a. And a front presentation unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500.

The attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large size. The special winning opening sensor 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 is provided (see FIG. 102). In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a starting opening solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2005 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B in 2004.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center in the front view, and the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed on the front of the. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. it can.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. You can't break into.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in a front view, and the game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501 can be discharged. It is provided with a warp outlet 2502 that is opened inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B emitted from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the position corresponding to immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is displayed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1111), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the position of the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2503, a portion (top portion) slightly higher than both left and right sides in the center of the left and right direction and a lowest portion (valley portion) on both left and right sides thereof are inclined so as to become lower toward the front. Therefore, the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the central portion in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 (the top) is located directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the upper surface and the upper part of the right side are the outer circumference (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a in a front view. It is attached so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. An attacker unit 2400 is attached below the upper right side of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, the game ball B can be accepted with a high probability of being opened (opened).

Although not shown in detail in the table production unit 2600, depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a plurality of effect decorations that are movable or emit light, and can perform movable effect and light emission effect. The front production unit 2600 is capable of performing a light emission production, a movable production, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of production decorations, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present the production of various patterns to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged. The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. To be done.

Further, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A magnetic sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects the magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 102).

The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a rear box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back relay box 3010. And the back production unit 3100 which is installed.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape having an open front, a square opening penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape projecting rearward with a gap from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in a rear view, and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, A cutout portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and has the lock mechanism 3020 attached thereto, is provided at the vertical center of the left side of the portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size such that the effect display device 1600 can be fitted in the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be vertically slidable.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the rear production unit 3100 and the like formed at appropriate positions.

The panel relay board 3031 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, a general winning opening sensor 3001, and a first winning opening sensor 3001. It is for relaying the connection with the one starting port sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

Although not shown in detail, the back production unit 3100 is in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a plurality of effect decorations that are movable or emit light, and can perform movable effect and light effect. The back effect unit 3100 can perform a light effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorations, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail in FIG. 102, but as shown in FIG. 154, the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 are directly connected to the main control board 1310. The magnetic sensor 3003, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the starting opening solenoid 2404, and the attacker solenoid 2405 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 3031. Good. A detailed description of the control configuration will be given later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 153.

The main control board 1310 serves as a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, and an input/output device (I/O device). A main control I/O port, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a RAM built in the main control MPU. A RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in, and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The main control MPU has, in addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. Mouth sensor 2402, general winning a prize sensor 3001 which detects the game ball B which is received in general winning a prize 2001, gate sensor 2401 which detects the game ball B which passes gate section 2003, game ball which is accepted in large winning a prize 2005 Detection signals from a special winning opening sensor 2403 that detects B, a magnetic sensor 3003 (which will be described as a magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the following description) that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are respectively controlled by the main control I. Input via the /O port.

The main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 by outputting a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals. From the main control I/O port, the status display 1401 of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal reserved display 1403, the first special symbol display 1404, the first special reserved number display 1405, the second special The drive signal is output to the symbol display device 1406, the second special reserved number display device 1407, the round display device 1408, or the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the special winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

Also, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B is frequently entered, so the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is provided. B is also frequently detected. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, although a detailed description thereof will be given later.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launch solenoid 542, and a ball feed solenoid 145 that performs a ball feed control. The control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail at the time of maintenance. 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the game ball B in the payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201), and a ball removal switch for starting the ball removal operation is provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has not only built-in ROM and RAM but also a function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information regarding the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 and various commands regarding payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) being input from the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball-cutting detection sensor 574, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED display through the payout control I/O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 through the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I/O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that "the ball is out" (specifically, the ball is cut off). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, the fact that "counting switch error" has occurred (specifically, there is an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit) is notified, and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, the fact that "CR is not connected" (the electric connection is cut off at any position from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit) is notified, When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of gaming balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and the signal is received by the payout control I/O port to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, which signal is the ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input, an oscillation circuit to output a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit which outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit which outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launching reference pulse and outputs it to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's intention is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

Based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. It is output to the firing solenoid 542 in response to the input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the received game ball B is delivered to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Sending the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 , Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for transmitting to a drive solenoid and outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side drive emission data composed of a door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame I/O port for frame decoration drive board From the door frame 3 side, or control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the display control unit serial I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512. , And outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 operates. Watching for activity.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and produces various effects from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The control is performed so that the music and the sound such as the sound effect in accordance with are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. A signal, a 2.1 ch surround signal, or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc.) can be sent to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

Also in the vibration speaker 354, as in the case of other speakers, the sound source IC is used to extract sound information that changes into vibration from the sound ROM based on the control data from the peripheral control MPU, and is used together with the push button effect. To be done. For example, the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when triggered by the sound "Press the button!" displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the sound "Press the button!" that is generated from the speaker that generates the sound. At this time, by using the sound information converted into vibration by the vibration speaker, the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 is seen as a diaphragm and the vibration of the vibration speaker is transmitted to the effect operation unit 301. At this time, the player feels as if the production operation unit 301 trembled.

Here, the vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, when resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the attachment method, it is necessary to input sound information of only a specific frequency. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb these variations in characteristics, the frequency of the input sound information is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a sine wave of 40 Hz±2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (swept) 8 times per 1 second in each 1 cycle. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and then inputting again after 1 second.

For inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibrating speaker at the time of shipment, a series of processes in the RAM clearing process as shown in steps S16 to S36 of the flowchart of FIG. 125 is used, or the RAM clearing process is triggered. I am trying to do it.
In the gaming machine described in this embodiment, the information stored in the main control board 1310 and the information stored in the payout control board 633 are stored and held in the same manner when the power is cut off.
Specifically, a capacitor that stores electric charge during energization is connected to a power supply terminal for a RAM included in the CPU, and power is supplied by the electric charge stored in the capacitor when the power is cut off.

Here, at the time of shipment of the game machine, sufficient electricity is not supplied, electric charges are not stored in the capacitor, and the RAM may be in an indefinite state. Then, when the power is supplied in the state where the electric charge is not accumulated in the capacitor, the RAM is abnormal because the checksum value and the backup flag value, which are recorded when the power is cut off, do not exist as normal values. Is determined. In that case, the CPU clears the entire area of the RAM and sends a RAM clear notification command to the sub control board as a command related to the state when the power is turned on. Upon receiving the RAM clear notification sound command, the sub control board repeats the notification regarding the RAM clear for a predetermined period, for example, 90 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the operation confirmation of the vibration speaker is performed using this RAM clear notification period.
When the push button is operated while the CPU of the sub-control board is in the RAM clear notification state, the CPU of the sub-control board, as described above, outputs a sine wave signal of 40 Hz±2 Hz (38 Hz to 42 Hz in 1 Hz units in 1 cycle each). As a result, it is changed (sweep) 8 times in about 1 second. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and then input again after 1 second, so that the vibration speaker is controlled for a predetermined period.

In the first place, the RAM stores information as collateral in the event of a temporary power failure when the player is in an advantageous state, for example, during a big hit or during probability changes. On the contrary, in order to maintain fairness between the players when the probability fluctuation state occurs just before the store closes or when the situation in which the player has to stop playing due to the probability fluctuation state due to the convenience of the player, A RAM clear function is provided as a function for returning the state to the initial state. Then, by pressing the RAM clear button when power is supplied, the series of processes for RAM clearing described above is executed even when it is determined that the button has been pressed. Therefore, even if the operation confirmation of the vibration speaker is performed during the RAM clear notification period, the state of the sub control board suddenly shifts to the operation confirmation state of the vibration speaker unless the RAM is intentionally cleared during normal business. There is no such thing.

Note that the sound source IC (or built-in IC) of the gaming machine described in this embodiment has six audio output terminals to which speakers can be connected, and the sounds set for each channel are mixed by the built-in mixer to make each speaker. Is output via the audio output terminal connected to.
Here, the audio output terminal can be selectively set. For the vibration speaker, one of the plural audio output terminals is set as the audio output terminal dedicated to the vibration speaker. ing.

Further, since the sound signal of the normal speaker and the signal for vibration of the vibration speaker have the same form, a common sound source IC can be used for generation of the signal. However, since the respective functions and purposes are different, it is preferable to separate the audio output terminal used for audio and the audio output terminal used as a vibration source in order to avoid confusion between the two. With this setting, for example, when it is desired to reduce the volume evenly all at once, the volume adjustment can be collectively controlled using the main volume or the like described later. It is possible to separately control the voice and the vibration so that the control can be performed without narrowing down the effects produced by the vibration speaker at the same timing.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external device. Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the production drive board of the game board 5 are serial input different from the display command. The output port is used, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The production drive board outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or based on the received game board side lighting/blinking command. The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

In addition, the production drive board sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Or output to.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the effect display device 1600 for display. (Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU has a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The “line buffer method” means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is changed to the effect display device 1600. It is a method of outputting to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 is large, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, in the case where various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the vertical position (hereinafter, referred to as “the order of sprite superposition”) when the positions arranged on the screen and the sprites overlap each other.

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats main scanning for sequentially setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. To each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 so that the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role object 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously recorded in one minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is an obstacle nail. By abutting against, the downflow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, which is higher than the highest part, the game ball B contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls up and down on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth to the front from either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on the left and right sides of the top. Is released. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the top of the center of the stage 2503, the top is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first starting port 2002 is likely to receive it. .. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

When the game ball B rolling on the stage 2503 is discharged into the game area 5a from the valleys on the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a is a first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, a general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and an attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 and the like.

By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 pulls it toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the start. There is a possibility that the mouth unit 2100 receives the first start opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B struck in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters to the right of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right hit). , Is discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. This portion is provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the game ball B hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is carried out in the main control board 1310, and when the result of the drawn ordinary lottery is "normal win", the second starting opening which is closed. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are delivered from the dispensing device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game ball B in which the "normal hit" is selected in the gate section 2003 is accepted in the second starting opening 2004.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is held until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is finished. Further, the number of holding of the ordinary lottery result is limited to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, “big hit”, A lottery of special lottery results that generate “middle hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time shortening (time shortening) hit” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, which is also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time saving (time saving) hit", " Probability variation short time hit", "probability variation short time no hit", etc.

The special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 while the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout controlling board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 pieces) from the payout device 580. The game ball B of is paid out to the upper plate 201. Accordingly, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball B, a large amount of the game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern for closing from is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, or to the special winning opening 2005. Accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B, and if any of the conditions is satisfied, an opening and closing pattern that puts the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, the "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, the "5R jackpot" is repeated for 5 rounds, and the "15R jackpot" is repeated for 15 rounds, and an advantageous game state advantageous for the player is generated.

In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the result of the special lottery that has been drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of this special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 directly controls the suggestion of the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on after blinking a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning on and off.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that, in a state in which three picture strings each consisting of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, each picture string is changed and the variably displayed picture string is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture strings are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture strings that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result that has been drawn. A player participation type effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board included in the door frame 3, each decorative board included in the game board 5, the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, and the like are appropriately used to produce a light emission effect. It is possible to perform a moving effect and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the present embodiment are the storage trays of the present invention, and the rendering operation in the rendering operation unit 300 of the present embodiment The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of the partial cover unit 310 are the decorative body of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment is the first decorative portion of the present invention. In the unit front cover 312, the dish center lower decorative body 312b is the second decorative portion of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate lower central decorative substrate 316 in the present embodiment are the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 in the embodiment respectively correspond to the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is provided on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 that is capable of opening and closing the main body frame 4 below the door window 101a. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing the water is bulged forward, and the tray unit 200 has a front end with a length of about 1/2 of the entire width of the door frame base 101. Is provided with a performance operation section cover unit 310 projecting forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101, and a central pressing operation section 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation concentrically arranged on the upper surface of the performance operation section cover unit 310. A section 303b and a rotation operation section 302 are provided. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in which the effect operation unit 301 is attached to the upper surface is provided below the door window 101a in which the inside of the game area 5a is visible. Since it protrudes greatly to the front, the dish unit 200 (rendering operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and appeal to the player. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play. Further, since the front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is largely projected forward under the door frame 3, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 should be kept away from the front end of the upper tray 201. In addition to the above, the left-right length of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 can be made longer than in the conventional case. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his/her hand on the upper plate 201, the area hidden by the player's hand with respect to the entire effect operation unit cover unit 310 is reduced. Therefore, when the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-emitted by the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 and the plate center lower decoration substrate 316, the player can emit light of the unit front cover 312. Can be easily noticed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is largely projected forward below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310. Since the front end of the unit becomes as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 is illuminated and decorated by the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 in accordance with the game state, and a production operation. When the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated by the ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the light illuminates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. With the light emitting decoration, the player's line of sight can be directed to the lower unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301, and by directing the player's line of sight downward, the inside of the game area 5a provided in the front. Can be kept away from the field of view of the player to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start opening 2004 or the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. By illuminating and decorating the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301, the player is directed to the lower side of the game area 5a, and then, when the player returns his line of sight to the game area 5a, effect images and movable By changing the body etc., it is possible to surprise the player and make a strong impact, entertain the player, and at the same time make the player think that there is something good Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the unit front cover 312 can be illuminated and decorated according to the game state so that the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area 5a. The light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate the arrival of a chance to the player (for example, generation of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (“big hit game”)). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is light emission decoration, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the unit front cover 312 is largely projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, he/she looks away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire gaming machine including the gaming area. Is easier to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has been placed in one tempo, and the player can be relaxed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation section cover unit 310 that is largely projected forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is emphasized and the player's interest is strongly attracted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing while enhancing appeal to the player. Also, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, and thus the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the handle 182 for the purpose, the handling of the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201, and the like, which makes it difficult to give stress to the player and suppresses a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 are arranged so that the semicircular cross section bulges outward. Since it extends in a semi-annular shape, half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut is projected forward, which makes it possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player. The player can play the game in a calm mood, and the player can concentrate on the game to suppress the decline in interest, and at the first glance, it is difficult for the player to get injured even if they come into contact. It is possible to recognize that the game is safe and to reassure the player, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the effect operation section 301 projecting from the upper surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 are simultaneously illuminated and decorated, so that the dish unit 200 bulges forward below the door window 101a. Since it is possible to decorate the whole with a light emission, it is possible to make the dish unit 200 stand out and strongly attract the interest of the player, and there is nothing good for the player due to the overall light emission decoration. In addition to being able to make you think, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the production operation unit 301 and urge the operation, and by making the player operate the production operation unit 301, entertain the player participation type production and entertain. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in the shape of a half donut, the dish center upper decoration board 314 and the plate center lower decoration board 316 are placed on the plate center top depending on the game state. When the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are entirely light-emitting decorated, the light-emitting decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. For example, when the light emitting decoration is performed so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the light emitting effect as if the light is moving and rotating inside the donut. It is possible to surprise and think that something is good, and at the same time, the rotary operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit cover unit 310 is provided with the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body. The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction as the light of 312b is rotating. Alternatively, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b arranged above and below are alternately arranged to emit light, so that the player can see a light emission effect in which light moves up and down. At the same time, the light moving up and down can prompt the player to press the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a. Therefore, by encouraging the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b to emit light appropriately, the player is prompted to rotate the rotating operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the player can appropriately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, which can entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame 3 extends forward from the side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 (outside the right side). A side in which three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction of the side window interior decoration member 412 are arranged at intervals in the up-down direction on the flat plate-shaped door frame right side unit 410 that is extended. Since the window 410a is formed, and in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off, the three side windows in the side window 410a are turned off. Through the space between the inner decoration portions 410b, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility). Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily operated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest. After that, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player can satisfactorily view the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The game can be played in the game area 5a, the player can enjoy the game, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

At this time, in the door frame 3 whose left side with respect to the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outer side far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is included. Since it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity by the part of, it is possible to make it difficult for the other player to see the entire game area 5a, as seen by the other player. By making it hard to feel, other players can play the game without hesitation. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a to change to a predetermined game state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 cause the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window interior. By dazzling the inside of 410a, the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a columnar shape, light can be emitted in a band shape and in a radial shape, making it difficult for the side window interior decorations 410b to become dazzling and to visually recognize the opposite side. In addition, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight to the side window interior decoration portion 410b by the light emission of the side window interior decoration portion 410b, and to diminish the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a. Visibility through 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player, such as the neighbor, to see inside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

More specifically, as the game state, for example, when the player is in a game state (scene) that suggests the opportunity to gain an advantage, the three side window interior decorations 410b are caused to emit light, and the side is illuminated by the glare. The visibility through the window 410a is reduced. This makes it difficult for another player, such as the neighbor, to recognize that an opportunity has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that another player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid that, because it gets distracted because other players can not concentrate on the game because they get noticed, or they feel lost due to mistakes being induced. Can be prevented, entertaining the game and suppressing a decrease in interest. Therefore, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a during a game state such as the arrival of a chance, so that the player can concentrate on the game. It can be made more entertaining and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the side window 410a, since the three side window interior decorations 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the angle at which the side window 410a is viewed from the side changes. Also, since the three side window interior decorations 410b do not appear to overlap, when the side window interior decorations 410b are not emitting light, the three side window interior decorations 410b in the side window 410a are passed through the opposite side. A player who can visually recognize (in the game area 5a) and is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without doing so.

Further, since the three side window interior decorations 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window interior decorations 410b of a certain height are made to emit light, the same height site in the game area 5a Since it can be made difficult to see from other players through the side window 410a, by causing a specific side window interior decoration portion 410b of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light according to the game state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (region) in the height direction within the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of opportunities and the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a during a game state such as the arrival of a chance, so that the player can concentrate on the game. It can be made more entertaining and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending long forward is provided with the side windows 410a penetrating left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off to open the side windows 410a. Since the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a in a state where the visibility through the island machine is ensured, the island facility is not required to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make it easier to detect that a fraudulent act is being performed in the game area 5a from the end, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side that is farther from the left side that is hingeably attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened and maintenance or replacement of the game board 5 is performed, it is possible to prevent the door frame 3 from becoming an obstacle by widening the door frame 3 and prevent the workability from deteriorating. can do.

Further, since the three side window interior decorations 410b are made to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "big hit" game) occurs (so-called, Depending on the (expected value), the decoration part 410b in the side window may be turned on or off. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect or reach development effect, when the expected value is low, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is caused to emit light so that it is difficult for another player to see, and an advantageous game state occurs. It is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players when the player does not do so (at the time of “miss”), and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the advantageous game state occurs even if the player can easily be seen by other players by not turning on or off the decoration portion 410b in the side window (it becomes a "big hit"). By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest without becoming an awkward atmosphere, and to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, thereby increasing the interest of the player in playing the game. You can entertain the game more.

Furthermore, since the three side window interior decorations 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility of occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous (so-called, Depending on the (expected value), the three side window interior decorations 410b are made to emit light in order (for example, bottom to top, top to bottom, center to top and bottom sides, etc.), or three side window interior decorations 410b. The particular side window interior decoration part 410b may be made to emit light. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, or the like, as the expected value becomes higher, the three side window interior decorations 410b are made to emit light in order from the bottom or from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the game and to suggest the expected value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

As described above, the three side window interior decorations 410b emit light in addition to light emission (lighting) and light extinction, blinking patterns, different emission colors, and changes in emission color (for example, from cool blue to hot). It may be a change in feeling to red, a change in blue-yellow-red like a traffic signal, or a change in brightness (luminance), and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above. The three side window interior decorations 410b can further enhance the decorativeness of the door frame 3, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal that attracts the player's attention.

Therefore, conversely, during execution of the reach effect or reach development effect, the advantageous game state for the player is determined by the presence or absence of light emission of the three side window interior decoration parts 410b and the light emission mode such as the light emission pattern. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of the possibility of occurrence (expected value), the player is excited depending on how the three side window interior decoration parts 410b emit light during execution of the effect.・It can be exciting, and the player's sense of expectation can be increased and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, the three side window interior decorations 410b may be made to emit light or be turned off arbitrarily by the operation of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3. .. As a result, for example, in the case of reach production or reach development production, when the possibility (so-called expected value) of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (for example, a "big hit" game) is low, a production operation is performed. By operating the portion 301 and causing the decoration portion 410b in the side window to emit light, it is possible to prevent the player from being seen by another player, so that no advantageous gaming state occurs (when the player is "missing"). In addition, it is possible to prevent an awkward atmosphere from being seen by another player, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation section 301 is operated so that the side window interior decoration section 410b does not emit light. By turning on (or turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window), an advantageous game state is generated even if it is seen by another player, so that it is not an awkward atmosphere and the interest is lowered. In addition to being able to suppress it, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and make the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the operation timing of the three side window decorations 410b may be set by operating the effect operation unit 301. As a result, in the preset default state, since the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be seen by other players is not set, some players feel uncomfortable by looking into the game and enjoy the game. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described operational effects, which is of interest to the player's game. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) so that the ball removal movable piece 592 cannot be rotated and the ball removal is performed. When the passage 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is unable to flow to the ball passage 580b by the ball removing movable piece 592. Then, it will continue to flow to the downstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, and can be sent to the dispensing blade 589 via the dispensing passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball-removing lever 593 is raised (unlocked) and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable (second state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is the payout passage. Without flowing to the downstream side of 580a, it will flow through the ball-moving movable piece 592 to the ball-passing passage 580b, and can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 which is the island facility side through the ball-passing passage 580b. it can. Further, since the payout vane 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, in a normal state, the ball removal lever 593 makes the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable (first state). On the upstream side of the payout vane 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a string of beads.

When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the game ball B is guided to the payout blade 589 side by the ball removing movable piece 592. Is sent to the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 pays out the game balls B one by one, so that the flow speed of the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B hits the ball. Since the force acting on the ball-removing movable piece 592 by contact is relatively weak, and the side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 that is opposite to the portion in contact with the game ball B is near the center of the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the ball removing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball removing movable piece 592 is not damaged. From this, it is possible to reduce the damage of the ball-moving movable piece 592 during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the damage of the ball-moving movable piece 592 and giving the player discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is to be discharged from the payout passage 580a at the time of replacement or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5), the ball removal lever 593 is raised to rotate the ball removal movable piece 592. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which was in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing movable piece 592, flows down to the ball-removing passage 580b side beyond the ball-removing movable piece 592. Become. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payoff blade 589 for suppressing the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is more than the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down soon. Thus, in the state in which the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-removing passage 580b, so the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the game ball vigorously, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the contact force causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the durability and breakage of the piece 592. From this, since it is possible to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus the pachinko machine. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the gap is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward. Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball movable piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably flowed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, opening/closing around the axis extending vertically on the left side The body frame 4 that is attached so that it is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axial center) on the left side of the body frame 4 are attached. In a state in which the door frame 3 that is openably and closably attached (rotatable hinge) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend in parallel, The payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like on the main body frame 4 side are connected to the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, and the like on the door frame 3 side. The connection cable 503 extends to the shaft core side from a portion of the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame 4 and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h. 4 is held by the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 and further extends to the vicinity of the axis, and then is folded back and extends in a direction away from the axis, The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side are held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 in the door frame 3. It is connected to the.

Then, when the door frame 3 that closes (closes) the front side of the main body frame 4 is hinge-rotated about the axis on the left side so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes the main body. Since the portion extending from the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503 moves forward from the front surface of the frame 4 so as to be separated from the main body frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, With the deformation of the connection cable 503, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) around the mounting shaft 502c that is distant from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4. In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502, which is close to the axis, protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, so that the connection cable guide The connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are less likely to get in the way.

In other words, since the connecting cable guide member 502 has its tip portion extended toward the shaft core side from the mounting shaft 502c that is rotatably attached, the base end portion of the guide member is fixed like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connection cable 503 is extended in a direction away from the axis, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. Since the position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, the folded back portion of the connection cable 503 can be set to a position where it is difficult to get in the way.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the main body frame 4 is closed, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves so as to approach the front surface of the main body frame 4, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are connected. And the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, and the door frame 3 is not sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Therefore, at the time of maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, the maintenance can be smoothly performed, and the maintenance is interrupted. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the game being played, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the connection cable 503, which extends from the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side, is folded back, and extends in a direction away from the shaft core, at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) becomes a circle passing through the cable holder 103a about the axis. Since the tangent line that touches and passes through the center of the attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is less than or equal to the angle that intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3, the longitudinal axis line of the connection cable guide member 502 that extends is the door frame 3 It is possible not to make an angle close to a right angle with respect to the rear surface. In addition, since the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the shaft center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 on the door frame 3 side, the connection frame 503 is held relative to the main body frame 4. When closing 3, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side.

From these things, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 will not close or the connection cable guide will be closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality such that the tip of the member 502 comes into contact with the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is broken. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance work when an abnormality occurs such that the door frame 3 needs to be opened and closed during the game to perform the maintenance. The game can be smoothly performed, an increase in the game interruption time can be suppressed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, the position closer to the shaft center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (the shaft center than the cable holder 103a). Is provided at a position closer to the main body frame 4 side to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and the pressing portion (axial center of the speaker duct 103 relative to the cable holder 103a). A part protruding rearward on the side). As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, so that the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 is pressed in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. In addition, a tangent line passing through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and tangent to a circle passing through the pressing portion about the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and the front surface of the main body frame 4. The intersecting angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. Accordingly, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens/closes) as the door frame 3 is opened/closed can be set to 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member is closed. It is possible to surely rotate the 502 in the closing direction, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

Further, since the frame pieces 502b are respectively provided on the two long sides of the guide body 502a in the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat plate-shaped guide body 502a is increased and it is difficult to bend, so that the connection cable 503 is securely attached. The pair of frame pieces 502b can guide the connection cable 503 in the longitudinal direction, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is increased, even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 composed of many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can reliably rotate around the mounting shaft 502c, the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state and more electric wires can be guided. Since this is possible, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be centralized in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

Further, in a state where the connection cable 503 is put between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding cable 504 is passed through the through holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503 to connect with the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 is easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 with the binding band 504 that has passed through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off from the guide member 502, and the connection cable guide member 502 The connection cable 503 can be reliably held, and the connection cable 503 is sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by removing the connection cable 503 from the connection cable guide member 502. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the occurrence, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects.

Further, the space below the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame 4 is connected to the bottom of the outer frame that constitutes the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connecting portion 621c and the connecting tubular portion 43a. Since the space is communicated with the space (portion inside space 40a) between the port member 47 and the connection tubular portion 43a in the assembly 40, the space inside the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side allow the main body frame speaker to be connected. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of 622 can be sufficiently secured, it is possible to output a deep bass sound from the main body frame speaker 622, and entertain the player with the sound of the deep bass sound to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. You can Therefore, by providing the cable attachment recess 501h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume inside the speaker unit 620a is reduced, a heavy bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be provided with a cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward below the main body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 having the above-described operational effect can be mounted on the main body frame 4 side. Further, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is mounted inside the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is housed in the cable mounting recess 501h, and the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and the interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 is prevented. This can be avoided so that the door frame 3 can be surely closed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body of the main body frame 4 is passed through the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion opening 501b of the frame base 501 can be seen from the front (player side), and the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is opened near the right end portion in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port is formed at the lower portion of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened near the left end portion on the opposite side to the member 47 in the left-right direction. The speaker unit 620a that communicates with the front surface side of the main body frame speaker 622 mounted below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4 and covers the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of the (speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, the sound such as voice, music, and sound effect output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front is generated by the speaker attaching portion of the speaker cover 621. It is radiated to the player side through 621a and the speaker opening 211b of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylinder portion 43a to the inside of the curtain plate inner space 40a constituted by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. And is radiated from the port member 47 to the front side of the player. At this time, since the space (enclosure 624) on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 is composed of the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40, The volume can be increased as much as possible, and a sound with extension in the low frequency range can be output forward from the main body frame speaker 622. In addition, since the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a in the enclosure 624). ), the width in the depth direction (front-back direction) at the connection portion can be made larger than in the conventional case, so that the widths in the front-back direction of the connecting cylinder part 43a and the connecting part 621c are made large, and the inside of the speaker unit 620a is Attenuation of sound from the space to the side of the curtain plate inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 can be reduced as much as possible. Further, on the outer frame 2 side, since the port member 47 has a cylindrical shape, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the low frequency range can be amplified and the phase can be inverted, and the port member can be inverted. It is possible to output a sound in which the bass is amplified from 47. The sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output front from the port member 47 interfere with each other in the front of the pachinko machine 1 and are combined, so that the volume is further increased. It is possible to make the player hear richer low-pitched sound, entertain the player with sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, as described above, the port member 47 inverts the phase of the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 and radiates the sound forward (a so-called bass reflex type speaker is configured), so the main body When the sound output from the frame speaker 622 to the front and the sound output to the front from the port member 47 overlap each other, the phases of the sounds are the same, so that the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the volume of the sound increases. The sound output can be increased with a simple configuration compared to the case of using the passive radiator of.

Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the lower outer frame assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion opening 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical size of them can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be provided. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, in general, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a in which the game is played is located above the center of the pachinko machine 1. From this, since it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower portion of the pachinko machine 1, it is lower than the game board insertion opening 501b in the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the main body frame 4 which constitute the lower side of the outer frame 2. Since the vertical dimension of the side can be made relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. , It is possible to output a sound with a richer bass sound, entertain the player with the sound, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, the connecting portion 621c abuts on the connecting cylinder portion 43a only by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected and the same effect as described above can be obtained, and since the sliding resistance is not generated between the connecting cylinder part 43a and the connecting part 621c, the opening/closing operation of the main body frame 4 becomes heavy. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability during maintenance and the like.

Further, since the connection tubular portion 43a and the connection portion 621c are sealed by the seal member 48, it is possible to prevent sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connection tubular portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, The pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-described effects can be provided.

Further, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, and thus the game board is relatively provided. The insertion slot 501b can be enlarged to include the game board 5 having a wider game area 5a, which can entertain the player more with the wider game area 5a, and through the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the wider game area 5a. By seeing, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the left-right direction, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Therefore, since the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front and the sound output from the port member 47 to the front are external frames. 2 (pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position distant to the front, and the sound can be amplified in the vicinity of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and as described above, On the other hand, you can hear a rich bass sound.

Further, as described above, since the sound output from the body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 to the front is interfered and amplified near the player, other sounds separated from the pachinko machine 1 can be used. The unamplified sound will reach the player. As a result, when a sound that suggests the arrival of an opportunity is output, the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 can hear a sound with a large volume and rich bass, thereby increasing the expectation of the game. Can be made On the other hand, it is difficult for a player playing a game with another pachinko machine to hear the sound from the pachinko machine 1, and thus it is difficult to recognize that the opportunity for the pachinko machine 1 is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to reduce other players from looking into the pachinko machine 1, and by looking into the pachinko machine 1, the player who is playing with the pachinko machine 1 feels uncomfortable and reduces interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the position of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set at the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a. Since the position of the connecting portion 621c is at the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be set from the vicinity of the left end portion where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center. 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, another member is arranged in a space secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction interposed therebetween, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by other members, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention strongly.

Further, as described above, a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction, so that the game ball B is discharged to the outside. A base unit 620b provided with a ball pulling guiding part 627, a discharge ball receiving part 628, and the like, and a ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1 and a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of the game medium balls can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be surely provided with them. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation portion protruding upward from the upper surface of the dish unit 200 which is bulged forward in front of and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game is played. 303a, an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b surrounding the outer periphery of the central pressing operation portion 303a and having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and an annular rotating operation surrounding the outer periphery of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. Since the parts 302 and the upper surface of the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 are arranged so as to be inclined so that the front end side of the upper surface of the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Since the head (face) faces in a certain direction, the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotary operation unit 302 can be easily seen, and three large operating units (press The operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, which can give a strong impact to the player, and the operation unit which is obviously different from the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be recognized at a glance that the operation unit is provided, and the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Further, since the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player participatory effect, and to advance the game so as to be in a game state in which the player participatory effect is executed (here, a lot of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). In addition, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type effect when the player participation type effect is executed, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, depending on the game state, the retreat position (lower position) in which the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are slightly projected from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 by the elevating mechanism including the operation button elevating drive motor 367 and the like. ) And a projecting position (raising position) projecting upward from the retracted position, and at the retracted position, the engaging portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 presses the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. Since the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in the retracted position in the disabled state, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b cannot be accepted. Therefore, the central depressing operation unit 303a can be depressed with certainty, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the state of the retracted position, since the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is in a state where it cannot be pressed, there is a stationary outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the rotation operation portion 302. Therefore, an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a with the momentum of rotating the rotating operation unit 302, or rotating the rotating operation unit 302 with the momentum of pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a. Can be made less likely to occur, the player participation type production can be surely enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Then, by moving to the protruding position, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are largely protruded upward on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, so that the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion are formed. 303b can be made conspicuous, a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling for the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be given, and there is something good. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making you think that it is. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate participation in the player participation type effect in which the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are pressed, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

In this protruding position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotation operating portion 302 are arranged concentrically. When the central pressing operation unit 303a has to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are pressed, or When the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b has to be pressed, the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are pressed and rotated. When the operation section 302 is rotated, or when the rotation operation section 302 has to be rotated, the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b is pressed, or the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a are pressed. It is possible to induce something that is pressed. This allows the player to perform a pressing operation or a rotating operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed or the rotating operation unit 302 to be rotated when performing the pressing operation or the rotating operation. , It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the pressing operation and the rotating operation, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect of performing the pressing operation and the rotating operation. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the player's game.

Further, the player is provided with a notification means such as the vibration speaker 354 and the effect display device 1600, and in the player participation type effect, the player presses the center in the protruding position where the pressing operation of the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b is possible. When only the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is mistakenly pressed when the portion 303a is to be pressed, the notification means notifies the central pressing operation portion 303a that the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed. The central pressing operation unit 303a that should be operated can be surely pressed, the player can enjoy the player participation type effect, and the mistake of the pressing operation is corrected, so that the player is lost by making a mistake. It is possible to avoid feeling uncomfortable, entertain the player participation type production, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the player believes that the central pressing operation unit 303a is being properly pressed, the reaction (change) of the player participation type effect despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion that the interest is reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, the player's belief can be corrected, and the central pressing operation portion 303a is correctly pressed to allow the player to participate. You can entertain the type production.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game is played, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate which store the game ball B for bulging forward and playing the game In the dish unit 200 provided with 202, an annular rotation operating portion 302 having an outer peripheral side surface, an upper surface, and an inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside and rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and an inner portion of the rotary operating portion 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is disposed in the rotary operation unit 302 according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a. The peripheral control board 1510 executes a player participation type effect of rotating and pressing the pressing operation unit 303. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, so that the rotation operation or the pressing operation is performed. Since the effect is changed, the player can participate in the effect, entertaining the player and suppressing a decrease in interest. When rotating the rotating operation unit 302, the player touches any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface that are exposed to the outside, and operates most, from the rotation center of the rotating operation unit 302. Since it is possible to rotate the rotary operation unit 302 by touching a distant position, the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotary operation unit 302 can be easily rotated. In addition, when the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operating section 302 is touched and rotated, the rotation operating section 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the player's hand so as to rub the outer peripheral side surface in one direction. it can. Therefore, even when a player participation type effect that requires high-speed rotation to the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, as described above, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed, and thus the player On the other hand, it is possible to entertain the effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, since the rotation operating unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early even if the rotation operating unit 302 is frequently rotated, and thus the rotation is prevented. It is possible to continuously entertain the player participation type effect of rotating the operation unit 302, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or can be rotated with a light force, in the player participation type effect, various rotation operations can be requested to the player, It is possible to request different rotation operations for each, and it is possible to present a wider variety and variety of player participation type effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get tired and suppressing a decrease in interest. You can

Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (which is constituted by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337) which is touched and rotated by the player is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes in an arc shape outward (direction opposite to the rotation center) from the rotating base 332, the dish unit 200 does not interfere even if it is rotated to rub the outer peripheral side surface. Since the rotation operating portion 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operating portion 302 is rounded, the rotation operating portion 302 can be rotated from a direction other than the side (the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it becomes easier to touch the outer peripheral side surface, the player can operate the rotary operating section 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operating section 302 when rotating the rotary operating section 302. Operability can be improved. Therefore, since the rotation operating unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operating unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, it is easier to perform a rotation operation at a minute rotation angle, or the rotation operation is easier than a rotation operation unit having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine. Since it is possible to increase the movement of the player in the case of, it is possible to make the player feel more rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and in the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit It is possible to entertain the rotating operation of 302 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in an annular shape and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotationally operates the rotation operating portion 302, the upper surface is not limited to the outer peripheral side surface. Since it is possible to rotate the touch panel by touching a part according to the player's preference or situation, such as the inner peripheral side surface, and the like, the operability of the rotary operation part 302 can be further enhanced, and the game of rotating the rotary operation part 302 can be performed. It is possible to make entertaining-type production more entertaining and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the player can rotate the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operating section 302 to the outside, even if the pressing operation section 303 is provided inside the ring of the rotation operating section 302, the pressing operation is performed. The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation are sufficiently enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest. Can be made.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation section 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can rotate the rotation operation section 302, so that the rotation operation section 302 cannot be gripped by the player. The appearance of the portion 302 can be completely different from that of a steering wheel of an automobile or a control stick of an airplane. As a result, for example, when the rotary operation unit is configured like a steering wheel of an automobile, the player thinks that the player operates the rotary operation unit at the moment when he or she sees the rotary operation unit. Since you can only operate like handle handling, you can not perform rotation operation different from handle handling when player participation type production that requires various rotation operations is executed, so player participation type production There is a risk that you may not be able to enjoy yourself and your interest in games may be diminished. However, in this embodiment, since the appearance of the rotation operation unit 302 is completely different from the appearance of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, etc., the player has a prejudice about how to operate the rotation operation unit 302. Thus, the player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 as he or she desires, entertaining the player participation type effect, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the projecting position, since the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Thus, the protruding push operation unit 303 does not get in the way, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the front and below the game area 5a where the game is played on the game board 5, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate that store the game balls B for bulging forward to play the game On the upper surface of the dish unit 200 provided with 202, an annular rotation operating portion 302 having a rotation shaft extending vertically, and a center pressing operating portion 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303 is formed, and the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the rotation axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345 to detect rotation. Therefore, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotary operation unit, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference. Further, since the rotation of the rotation operating portion 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350). The part that meshes with) only needs to be a part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation part 302. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space below the rotation operation section 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape in a height between the rotation operation section 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. The operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged. Then, in accordance with the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration substrate. By appropriately making the plurality of LEDs of 352 emit light, the entire ring outer upper cover 335, ring outer lower cover 336, and ring inner cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 can be sufficiently (uniformly) illuminated decorated. Thus, the rotation operation unit 302 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345, It is possible to sequentially emit (turn on/off) the plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the same direction and at the same speed. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in a state in which specific portions of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are decorated with light emission. It is possible to give an illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. Alternatively, according to the game state, when the player participation type effect that requires the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the desired direction, the player can be prompted to perform a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the rotation direction and rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302, and are arranged in an annular shape on the production operation ring decoration substrate 352. The plurality of LEDs can be sequentially turned on so as to have the same rotation speed as the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, even though the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated together with the rotation operation unit 302 while a certain portion of the rotation operation unit 302 is emitting light. , A strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be given by the rotation of the rotation operation section 302 and the light-emitting decoration, and there is something good for the player. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, since a plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are sequentially made to emit light, the light emitting decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation section 302 can be shown to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the ring-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is for rotating operation, and to facilitate the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is attached rotatably around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation part 302, and when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation part 302, the rotation operation is performed. The transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the section 302, and the configuration related to the rotation operation section 302 in the dish unit 200 (production operation unit 300 or rotation drive unit 340). Can be made compact, the diameter of the rotation operating portion 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operating portion 302 can be made conspicuous to attract the player's attention.

Further, it is provided with an operation ring drive motor 342 that rotationally drives the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state, and as described above, rotation capable of light emission decoration by the production operation ring decoration substrate 352. Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the rotation operation of the player, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated around according to the game state, and light is emitted. By the decoration, the rotation operation section 302 can be made conspicuous below and in front of the game area 5a, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation section 302.

Further, since the rotation of the rotation operating section 302 can be detected by the transmission detecting gear member 345, the first rotation detecting sensor 347, and the second rotation detecting sensor 348, when the player rotationally operates the rotation operating section 302, By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be lightened. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, it is possible to give a load to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302. Can be heavy. Further, in response to a rotational operation by the player, a rotational force is applied to the rotational operation section 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring drive motor 342, whereby the rotational operation of the rotational operation section 302 is performed. A click feeling can be added. Further, by rotating the rotary operation part 302 back and forth within the predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotary operation part 302 can be vibrated. In this way, since various operation feelings can be given to the rotation operation section 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to support a wider variety of player participation type effects, so that various effects can be achieved. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, since the production operation ring decoration board 352 is provided, when the operation feeling of the rotation operation section 302 is given by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the production operation ring decoration board 352 are the same as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in one direction or sequentially emitting light in the opposite direction to the rotating operation, the operation feeling can be supported by the light, so that the player can enjoy the rotating operation of the rotating operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is set larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, it is easy to secure a space below the rotary operation unit 302, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation section 302 can be made to emit light more uniformly and brightly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the central button decoration substrate 376, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a are respectively illuminated and decorated in good condition. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating them, only the rotating operation part 302 is decorated with light emission, only the pressing operation part 303 is decorated with light emission, only the central pressing operation part 303a is decorated with light emission, and the outer peripheral pressing operation is performed. Only the part 303b can be decorated with light emission, and the player can easily recognize the operation part he/she wants to operate, so that the player participation type effect can be enjoyed.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape on the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect such that the light is rotated by sequentially emitting light from the LEDs. It is possible to perform an effect in which the effect by the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is associated with the effect by the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. Specifically, for example, when urging the player to rotate the rotating operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are sequentially made to emit light, respectively. , In two rows, the light decoration is performed in which the light rotates. Alternatively, while the player is rotating the rotating operation unit 302, the LED (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 may rotate light according to the rotation of the rotating operation unit 302, or On the other hand, when it is desired to promote the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the opposite direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 performs light emission decoration such as rotating light in the opposite direction. In this way, since the player can see the effects produced by various light emission, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, a rotary operation unit 302, a peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and a central pressing operation unit 303a, which are arranged concentrically, are provided with a production operation ring decorative substrate 352, an outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and a central button decorative substrate 376, respectively. Since it is provided, for example, the operation operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the center button decoration substrate 376 are made to emit respective LEDs in this order, or in the reverse order, so that the rotation operation section 302 is provided. From the center pressing operation unit 303a, and the effect of light diffusing from the center pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302 can be shown. As a result, a variety of light-emitting decorations can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and the interest of the player can be directed to the central pressing operation unit 303a or the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to encourage the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 to entertain the player participation type effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which a game is played is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is opened and closed. On the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 that is closed as possible, a door window 101a that allows the game area 5a to be viewed from the front is formed, and a glass unit 160 having a transparent flat glass plate 162 is attached to the door window. It is attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close 101a, and below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101, an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 for storing game balls B for playing a game. The dish unit 200 equipped with is attached.

Then, on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, a circular donut-shaped rotary operation portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a are attached, and a semi-circular donut shape similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operation portion 302. And two plate center upper decorations 312a and lower plate center decorations 312b having a larger diameter are attached vertically spaced apart from each other, and are continuous with both ends of the plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b. The door frame left side unit 400 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative unit 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top decorative unit of the door frame top unit 450 having the same shape as described above. 453 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

Therefore, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b, and the rotation operation part 302 and the outer periphery pressing member are arranged. Since the operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous, and the player can operate them. The rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, which is interesting. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, the rotation operation section 302 and the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have a donut shape similar to a circular columnar shape (tube), and are provided below the rotation operation section 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decoration body 404, a door frame right side decoration body 419, and a door frame top decoration body 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the plate center decoration body 312a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 5a with a cylindrical tube, and to give a sense of unity to the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved and the appeal of the player can be enhanced by directing the player's interest toward the inside (the game area 5a and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by increasing expectations for a game on the pachinko machine 1.

Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player is performed. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easy to see, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, so that the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to make the player immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected farther forward than the upper dish 201, and at the same time, the dish center is raised. Since the decorative body 312a and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operating unit 302, the dish central upper decorative body 312a, and the dish central lower decorative body 312b are made to stand out significantly. At the same time, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, since the rotation operating portion 302 has a donut shape like a circular column shape, the rotation operating portion 302 has an upper surface, an outer side surface, an inner side surface, etc. as compared with a flat disk shape. Since the fingers are easily caught, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 as he or she likes. Further, since the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are formed larger than the rotation operation section 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are larger than the rotation operation section 302. Since it protrudes to the outside, it is possible to place an arm or a finger on the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 in a comfortable posture. It is possible to prevent the player from getting too close to the rotation operation unit 302 due to the presence of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b protruding forward of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotation operation unit 302 in which the arm and fingers for the player to operate can be secured, and the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved. In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, it is possible for the player to think of the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player can be played by the player. It is possible to entertain the participatory type production and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the pressing operation part 303 including the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b and the central pressing operation part 303a inside the rotation operating part 302 is movable between the retracted position (down position) and the protruding position (up position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 is in a state of protruding more than the rotating operation unit 302, so that the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 may appear larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, can attract the player's interest strongly, and increase the expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and suppress the deterioration of interest. Can be made.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 becomes relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's interest can be directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 becomes more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, by moving the pressing operation unit 303 between the lowered position and the raised position according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, the player is prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301 to be operated. Therefore, the player can appropriately operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to enjoy the player participation type effect.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotating operation unit 302 is set to the lowered position, the rotating operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a have the same height, and the rotating operation is performed. The part 302 and the central pressing operation part 303a become operable, and when the pressing operation part 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer circumference pressing operation part 303b and the central pressing operation part 303a project above the rotation operating part 302. With this, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, depending on the content of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be used properly, and it is possible to deal with more various productions, and the player can enjoy various operations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, the dish center lower decoration substrate 316, the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410. Since the board 418, the door frame top central decoration board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302 and the dish center top decoration body 312a. By making the plate center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light, the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 is improved. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal can be obtained by strongly attracting the interest of the player. Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 emit light as appropriate. By decorating, the player's line of sight can be guided from within the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302) or from the effect operation unit 301 into the game area 5a, so that the game is played. It is possible to allow the player to operate the effect operation unit 301 or to play a game in the game area 5a according to the state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, even when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end while the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the raised position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is not pressed. Although not detected, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b may be detected. Thereby, even if the same pressing operation is performed, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different presentation modes, and when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted. It is possible to perform a variety of player participation type effects, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the pressing operation unit 303 (the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the raised position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, it moves to the lowered position. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the raised position, the downward movement may be restricted after moving slightly downward from the raised position.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one in which the rotation operation portion 302 is provided on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 which bulges forward is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation operation portion is provided inside the dish unit. The outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation portion may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the dish unit. Also by this, it is possible to entertain the player with the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit as described above, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the speaker unit 620a, which is communicated with the curtain plate inner space 40a (port member 47) through the connection cylinder portion 43a, is provided in the main body frame 4, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose interior communicates with the port member 47, and the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

[Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102, 154, and 103 to 120. 102 and 154 are block diagrams of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board. 103 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 102, and FIG. 104 is a game ball or other lending device connection terminal for relaying electrical connection between the payout control board, which constitutes the main board, and the CR unit and frequency display board. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from the board, FIG. 105 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 154, FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 107 is a liquid crystal display control. FIG. 3 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in the unit.

In the above-described embodiment, the door frame 3 is not provided with an effect display device related to effect display. However, in the following description, in addition to the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, the door frame side effect display device 460 (see FIG. 107) related to the effect display can be provided on the door frame 3 as well. The control configuration will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 102, the control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, and a peripheral control board 1510, and is responsible for various controls. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is also executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the power was turned on and the game operation is performed. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, a power failure or an instantaneous voltage of a predetermined voltage. A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors a sign of a stop is mainly provided.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in Hard random number circuit 1310an"). This main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical value range (in the present embodiment, the numerical value value 0 is set as the minimum value and the maximum value is the value 32767 is preset). The predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, without overlapping other values within the predetermined numerical range. Extract one after another. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main-control-internal hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main-control MPU 1310a makes a big hit on the value extracted by the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main-control internal hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are inputted to its various input terminals. Reset control main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a reset control-less main control output circuit 1310cb not provided with a reset terminal It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because it is not reset by the main control system reset described later, It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 99, a first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and general. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball that entered the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered in. In addition, the gate sensor 2401 which detects the game sphere which passes the gate section 2003 which is shown in Figure 99, the big winning a prize sensor 2403 which detects the game sphere which enters into the special winning a prize 2005, and the back unit 3000 which is shown in Figure 100. The detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 attached to the above and detecting a fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 3031 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 via the panel relay board 3031, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function through the panel relay substrate 3031 and the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device 1404. , A second special symbol display device 1406, a first special reserved number display device 1405, a second special reserved number display device 1407, a normal symbol display device 1402, a status display device 1401, and a round display device 1408 to output a drive signal or To do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the board 633 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the special winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game balls are frequently entered. Therefore, the special winning opening sensor 2403 also frequently detects the game balls. For this reason, the special winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 2001 and 201 do not frequently detect the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020. Therefore, the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020 use mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switches.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, so that the payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is performed. Various commands are transmitted to the board 633 as serial data. When the payout control board 633 completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (payment main ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main control serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I/O ports, etc., connects the bus 1310ah. They are connected via a circuit (see FIG. 112). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. 112). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310eaa and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main circumference serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 108) is provided. The capacitor BC0 enables the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are operated signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 633 and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. With this as a trigger, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc., displays a payout control section 633a for performing various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 having various functions, and the state of the pachinko machine 1. Error LED indicator 860b for The operation switch 954, which also has a function as a RAM clear switch, is a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in (.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout, controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and also pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Detecting from a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM storing various control programs including a payout control program controlling operations and various commands, and a RAM temporarily storing data, and various detection switches related to payout. To output a drive signal to the payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, the payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 89. And a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially outputs various information (game information) about a game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about payout as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancel command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence command and error cancel navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output as serial data of a serial system to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start the payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program sends a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to outputting, when a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, which will be described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information, and a dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, which has no reset terminal and has no reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset described later, and thus the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to the external board or the like by not being reset by the payout control system reset, which will be described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

A ball-out detection sensor 574 that detects out-of-balls of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560, and a payout detection sensor 591 that detects game balls released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 580. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 will be simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 630 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port thereof in the serial data system, or the operation signal of the operation switch 954 (detection). Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control without reset function 952cb, thereby performing the payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.

When the main control board 1310 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. From the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d to output a drive signal to the payout motor 584, or from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the pachinko machine 1 to display an error LED indicator. By outputting the drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the fact that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 580 is informed, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball ball" (specifically At the entrance of the distribution space that communicates with the supply passage of the dispensing device 580 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball are meshed near the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. "Payment detection sensor error" is displayed when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is abnormal based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). That a “retry error” has occurred when the number “5” is displayed (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value). When the number “6” is displayed, it means “full tank” (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates "CR not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit 6) Is notified), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (not yet paid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet) That the number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photo couplers. ), the number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error content regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) is transmitted to the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or fail, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 633 that controls the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first a frequency display plate 365, a main door relay terminal plate 880, and a terminal device connection terminal plate for gaming balls and the like. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is adapted to be inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented gaming ball, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit, such as the gaming ball. The lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball lending display section. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display unit is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the main door relay terminal plate 880. There is.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 108) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 633 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, judges as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection board for lending devices such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout controller 633a and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 633 but also the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (to be precise, the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the board of the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the board of the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 633, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The board with the terminal board 880, and the board with the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V to be described later from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC+12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as “+12V”) in this embodiment from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and the ground LG. , While supplying to the payout control board 633 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, while supplying to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 ..

The frequency display plate 365 has a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. And a return button 329, which is a segment indicator, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining loan display portion 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 turns on (turns on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball lending/returning display section has three segment display units arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment display units are sequentially driven by one-digit segment display unit, which is a so-called dynamic lighting system. The segment display of is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the ball lending display unit displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or an error of the CR unit 6. The ball lending display unit displays the digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating the 1-digit segment display of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are from the CR unit 6 to the rental ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and main door relay terminal board. When input via 880, the 1-digit segment display sequentially emits light in accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G. The content of the light emission of is visible through the remaining lending display portion 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending display unit. In the CR unit lamp 365d, the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 630 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the remaining balance display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit through the current limiting resistors mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like. The payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental device connection terminal board for game balls and the like. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a game ball for 200 yen is paid out, and when a clerk in the hall or the like presets the CR unit 6, the payout operation is performed once. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball or other lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power board 630]
Next, the power supply board 630 will be briefly described. The power supply board 630 includes a power supply switch 934 that can electrically connect and disconnect 24 V AC (24 V AC) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. A firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing by the firing solenoid 542 of the hitting ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility by operating the power switch 934 and the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents that are supplied from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source.

[7-3-2. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a, which controls the firing by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. The firing control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182, and the palm of the handle 182. A detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of the game ball according to the player's intention. And the detection signal from the input terminal are input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal indicating that fact is input via the payout control board 633. ..

The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and outputs it to the launch solenoid 542. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The control for sending the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side is performed.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also effects drawing of the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, and the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are performed, while the speaker 921 and the upper speaker are used. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from 573, and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second. A control unit 4165 and a volume adjusting volume 1510a that adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob unit.

[7-4-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at power-on and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and various LED light emission modes) Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for managing schedule data etc. for defining, and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT 1511e" for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally). ]) is provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored content only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from an unillustrated large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board 630. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 630, when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Lamp light emitting data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp from a lamp drive board serial I/O port via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door frame. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs and the like provided on each decoration board of No. 3 is output from the peripheral I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED for peripheral control. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the rendering operation unit 400, and a press detection switch for detecting operation of the press operation unit 405. Detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is output from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and is input to the production operation unit detecting serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are game board sides (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e together. Is diagnosed.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as a center, a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/into the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while at the same time, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control internal WDT 1511af, Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak are read/written via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the I/O port 1511ag and the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control built-in serial I/O ports 1511ae and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , Peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, in order to independently perform data transfer without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Further, while reading/writing from/to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and Reading/writing is performed on an input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I/Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and other storage devices are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, while various peripheral control various types are performed. For peripheral I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai are used. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 1511ae include serial I/O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I/O ports for motor drive boards, serial I/O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. Serial I/O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port, a main control board serial I/O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I/O port.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and resets the signal. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count, and thus is not reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. It should be noted that the LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects can be played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk in the hall of the occurrence of an abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and contents related to game performance are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player). Of the notification sound and the notification sound of the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound of the notification sound and the notification sound do not depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The sound volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into seven stages described above, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
Accordingly, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is generated. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal or the player is conducting an illegal act, the alarm sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while There is a possibility that the volume played is increased and music and sound effects are added, and the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, or a game state advantageous to the player is entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arraying light emission data that defines light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some of them are read and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some, the copied one is read out.

Further, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 is corrected according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the LED type backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described below, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600 is included, and, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is also acquired. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. When December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the game board side effect display device is displayed. When the backlight of 1600 is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85% which is obtained by further adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that stores, among the various types of information that is updated by execution of various control programs, those that are backup targets. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy areas 1511cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs and various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce stored exclusively, and a backup non-management target work area 1511cf that stores only various information that is not a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs, Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on status command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a game state (for example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Is dedicatedly stored as a backup target, and the performance information (1 ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later is backed up. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. "Bank" is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a. Since a V blank signal indicating that it is in a state in which the screen data from can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) From the place where the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effect described later. The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As will be described later, “(1 ms)” means that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, so that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, And “Bank4” (the effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) has a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is set. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and receives the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are also things that are set.

In Bank 0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. A storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies are set, and detection operation signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai. Various information obtained by rotating (rotating direction) the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the above (for example, a dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like) are set in the storage area. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged around. When the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of abnormalities and the state of occurrence of abnormalities during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 are set.

It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control section steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It The peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage region 1511cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed last time, the processing is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -When DAT is set and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Then, when the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag Sometimes, when the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like this.

Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing the copied copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac controls the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which are managed as one page in total. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the storage area that is normally used, is such that each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, every 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed. The page consistency is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. It is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), that is, two pairs in total. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Contents that are copied at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time the regular processing is executed, and are also stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is designed to perform high-speed copying, but the programs for executing the high-speed copy by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs, A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 122). Is an instruction to start the RAM clear effect and a game state (for example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 103 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power). Even when) is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are zero-cleared. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state). While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit game state and a special production flag). (For example, information) is stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and is “Bank”. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. Since "(SRAM)" is a backup target for various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank4” (the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the production information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The backup second area 1511dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display controller]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the sound control of the music, the effect sound, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is as shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source and various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various sounds such as music and sound effects. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and serializing to the door frame side effect display device 460. The rendered drawing data is arranged toward the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. A door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d for transmission, and a differential circuit 1512e for differentiating LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a plus signal and a minus signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is transmitted. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. I have it. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later. The operation menu background image data to be used, the selection display object image data used to display at least one selection display object described later, the tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described below, and the volume adjustment icon described below. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the body frame backside image data used to display the bodyframe backside image in which the position of each part on the backside of the bodyframe 4 is visible to the player, and the display of the service mode screen The service mode screen image data used for, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying a suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the press operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After the data is extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the first screen data is generated according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae when a V blank signal described later is input. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data, every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound command data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral. After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the V blank signal is input, and the first data is generated according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is input with the V blank signal for the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the built-in sound source described above, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. Side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VRAM for doing so is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. Performance display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are Although attached to the game board 5, the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect "V-by-One (indicated by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential type communication called "registered trademark"", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 is an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
Signaling) uses a serial-type differential interface, while channel CH2 uses a parallel-type interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and is housed in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. Then, various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, On the basis of the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, and one screen (1 for displaying on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side The image display data for the effect display device 460 is supplied from the channel CH2 to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means the drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also shows image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps for a second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall, etc. of the occurrence of abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 and fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a.
The sub volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels of the internal sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value, which is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume control volume 1510a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually compared with the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To the master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the usage The maximum volume is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, in the case where the effect sound is being output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control for sending the notification sound to notify the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko machine 1 will be simply described. To explain, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track containing the effect sound to mute, and the sound data of the track incorporating this effect sound, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification sound. The sound data of the track in which is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

That is, actually, only the notification sound of the maximum volume is played as the sound played through the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After the predetermined period has elapsed, the notification sound is forcibly set to silence. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the schedule data is adjusted again by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a and the adjusted board volume is set again as the sub volume value (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed. If the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set when the mode is changed to the setting mode by operating the section 401 or the pressing operation section 405, the sound is played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

As described above, when the effect sound is being output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the alarm sound is output to notify the store clerk or the like of the hall that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity on the pachinko machine 1, the effect is produced. Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, since the effect sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed a predetermined period. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound started to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 107, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is for playing the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and the frame peripheral relay as the serial data of the differential method in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and also as left-side audio data as positive/negative differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right difference systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 107, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses the parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal each have 8 bits, that is, 24 bits in total. In the present embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, that is, 18 bits in total, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalid although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals that are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals that are a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. Signal and clock signal and three synchronization signals are serialized into differential serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only a differential 1 pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source includes the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first Since the length of the wiring required for the second route) is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 so as to be openable and closable, the door frame 3 is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, on the main body frame 4 side such as the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 580, the game balls paid out by the payout device 580 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is also played. A full tank branching unit 770 that can guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.

Further, below the main body frame 4, there is arranged the payout unit 560 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 630 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is integrated into a unit. As described above, various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 580, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 630, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 584 provided in the payout device 580, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment where it is subject to noise that has entered the.

Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, " By adopting differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the structure is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to be described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel lines provided in parallel. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where parallel lines are adopted as the differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 Even if the differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted and the mechanism is not easily affected by noise, the hardware configuration alone causes electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., a performance display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Since noise is not canceled (removed) when being received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as irregular data different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sandstorm appears. There is a problem in that such an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the channel frame CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source has a door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510. In the transmitter IC for rendering 1512d, differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration, Then, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. Adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame effect effect display device 460. By doing so, it is possible to reliably display the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described below included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are described. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but are separately assembled, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connecting various wirings such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is removed from the body frame 4 to perform maintenance of the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If it can be done and the abnormality that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the abnormal door frame 3 and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data of the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive. The board 4450 and the boards are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thus, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, The power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are respectively formed with the above-mentioned video transmission wiring patterns separated from the power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. In the path from the transmitter to the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are laid across a plurality of relay terminal boards, and therefore the video transmission formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal for transmitting serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450, they are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while in the wiring for transmitting the power supply and other various signals, they are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one wiring is red and the other wiring is gray, and the wiring for supplying power in the harness is red and the other wirings are gray. .. Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is supplied to the compulsory switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is adapted to be transmitted to the stored effect display drive substrate 4450. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f also outputs LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Are differentially input to the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is demonstrated by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the connection of the,, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit these two signals when two signals that have been differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, while the differential circuit 1512f is differentially connected. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the digitizing circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are connected in a circuit. Has been done. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. , From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while being transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e. When the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and therefore the door frame side effect transmitter. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, and is serialized. It is mainly configured by a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal described later to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not abnormal when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is detected. While it is possible to determine that there is no abnormality in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 has an abnormality, and a notification image (for example, "abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device" to inform that effect). "Please call a clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and at the same time, a notification sound to that effect (for example, "abnormality occurs on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device"). ") is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound is output from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, it is possible to perform the notification by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 105, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above. Based effects can be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, if it is December 25th, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or if it is New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the brightness setting information of the LED when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the LED brightness, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set game. The board side effect display device 1600 and the brightness of the LED as the backlight of the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, and hour, minute, second that are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to ON/OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date/time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year in which the input date and time information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time which is month and day and hour, minute and second.

As described above, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information and input date/time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, probability of occurrence of jackpot gaming state with low probability or high probability).

The brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. The brightness can be adjusted. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type, the game board side effect is displayed. A decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time for identifying the date. Time information specifying minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% is set. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% which is obtained by further adding 5% which is the acquired correction information. When 12 months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, a value of 85% is added to the 75%, which is the correction information acquired. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is obtained.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of the music, the effect sound, or the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and the peripherally-controlled A/D converter 1511ak electrically connected to the volume portion 1510a has a knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 levels are divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of the occurrence of an abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect. The contents related to the game, etc. (for example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or there is a high possibility that the player is in a gaming state advantageous to the player). Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound have a mechanism that does not depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven levels of the substrate volume, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as the music or the sound effect that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is generated. However, when the abnormality is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is committing an illegal act, the notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the player's cheating by the notification sound.

Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to be more powerful in addition to increasing the volume of sound that is played and to add to music and sound effects. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

In the present embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects are adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and in addition to the dial operating unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400, By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included in a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of, the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the store clerk can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and cannot hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel the music or the sound effect is noisy. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music or effect sound can be adjusted to a desired volume. Accordingly, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult for the clerk in the hall to hear the adjusted sound volume and hear the music and the sound effect, the effect operation unit 400 When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the above can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the clerk in the hall feels the volume adjusted to be loud and the music or sound effect is noisy, the effect operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and was playing the game felt the volume adjusted to be low and could not hear music or sound effects, he or she sat down in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and last time, sit down on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 to play the game. If the player feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time operates the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation section 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. 108 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 108. First, the power supply board 630 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board 630]
The power supply board 630 is electrically connected to a power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 630, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 108, the power supply board 630 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a firing control unit 633b. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and that supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The portion 633b is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 542 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 630 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 V AC (24 V AC) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies the rectified circuit to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to generate direct current +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple to smooth the +37V and supplies the smoothed +37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control unit 633b.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633. The backup power is supplied to the specified RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 633b uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source, and sets the game ball at a launch strength (firing strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182, as shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward, the output to the firing solenoid 542 is controlled, while the constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 250, the ball feeding unit 250 is driven. The ball feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball striking device 650 side.

The power supply generation circuit 935d is +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to direct current +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), direct current +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and direct current. +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as “+24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 633 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with +5V is supplied as a +5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with +12V is supplied as a +12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with +24V is supplied as a +24V power supply line.

The +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 633 as described later. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 633 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 633. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633 and is also paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 on the control board 633. In other words, +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 630 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Electric current flows to the plus terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 returns to the payout control board 633 and again from the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. Is supplied and can be recharged. As a result, when +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM to retain the stored contents. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g has a current flowing toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current flows toward the. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V by the electrical connection method in which +5V created by the +5V creating circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630, so that the capacitor BC0 is charged. You can do it. As a result, +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a has a diode at the power supply terminal. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

Three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 are supplied to the payout control board 633 as shown in FIG. 108, and among these three kinds of voltages, +12V and Two types of voltage of +24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the surroundings via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

The three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are, as shown in FIG. 109A, the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b for generating a direct current 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3V”) from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generating circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as “+9V”) from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to +9V created by the +9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates +3.3V to +3.3V. The +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components forming the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 107, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from this +5V. The +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode PD0 and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). Is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is not used in the payout control board 633 at all, and is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. The +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply substrate 630 via the payout control substrate 633, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V applied power supply system created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is a +5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and +5V of the main control board 1310 is not provided. The +5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a and the like, for example. +12V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notification when detecting signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 633. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. The power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 109(b). At the same time, it is adapted to be input to the decorative board of the door frame or the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies the voltage to one of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to the two power lines of the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case of monitoring the generated voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, a circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. 110 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 112 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 108 will be described, and subsequently, the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, and the main control MPU. Various input/output signals to and from the control interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control circuit shown in FIGS. 154 and 110. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 110, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )) is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is applied with +5V created by the +5V creating circuit 1310g at its 1st terminal, its 2nd terminal is grounded (GND), and the noise component is removed from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is first electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed first. Have been smoothed.

The +5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). By being connected to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is subject to the power failure or the momentary power failure. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of which is connected to the ground (GND) capacitor MC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 108 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM and the capacitor BC0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 is not supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, creating +5V. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the VDD terminal. Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 110, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, and has a delay circuit built therein. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND) capacitor. It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The associated main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 110, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the output terminals A, B, C, and ST, which are output frequency selection terminals, in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from an F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to each of the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the clock signal of 24 MHz is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is from the general winning a prize mouth sensors 3001 and 4020, the first starting mouth sensor 3002, the second starting mouth sensor 2402, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the large winning a prize sensor 2403, and the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal of, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633 and a main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built into the MPU 1310a, or when the error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and an error release after the power is turned on (after the period for performing the function as RAM clear has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) It has the function of performing. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of releasing the error of the payout control board 633, if the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 is controlled. A process for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

To the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 633, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the payout control board 633 is logical. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 633 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

As shown in FIG. 110, the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 633 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on has a pull-up with one end electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 633 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the operation switch 954 is operated. During this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to perform a RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal which is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 to turn on the transistor MTR0. The circuit will also turn on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a is for instructing to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. To judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 633. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage +5V in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The signal reliability is enhanced by using +12V which is the voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second starting opening sensor 2402, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor. The detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, and the gate sensor 2401 which are input through the panel relay board 3031 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input to the 1310, it is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 through the payout control board 633, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure. When the power failure or momentary power failure is detected, a power failure notice signal is sent as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952a of 633 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +24 V, the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12 V, and the output of the power failure warning signal will be described.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 111, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 (multiplied by the voltage). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal which is the anode terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 is grounded to the ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , +12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the third terminal which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the negative terminal of the MIC21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power failure or the instantaneous blackout is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 111, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the +24V power line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +24V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC23. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of +24V starts a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from +24V. Then, the monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that is pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled down to the logic level and becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power failure or the instantaneous blackout is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 111, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC25. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) when the voltage of +12V starts a power failure or an instantaneous power failure and the voltage starts to drop from +12V. In this case, the monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, the 7th terminal, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A described above. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that has been pulled to the side and the logic has become LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Further, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state when the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, and outputs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as the signal which is the inverted signal of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal which is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is output. On the other hand, when the signal having the logic HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latched state is set. Further, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is set to the latch state by inputting the signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. When this signal is input, a state in which a signal whose logic is HI is output from the output terminal 1Q is maintained (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic). Maintain the status output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, since the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are respectively grounded to the ground (GND), they are connected to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of +24V, and the power failure of +12V, to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. Alternatively, the signal from the terminal 7 which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and based on these signals, the signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND) and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. Is not connected.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time in a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a becomes LOW and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted to an output terminal. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D type flip-flop MIC22 sets a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs it as a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 633 and outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 111, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also has a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (MIC23A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset in the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29 and the logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The power failure notice signal is the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Input to PA1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the payout control board 633 as the payout power failure notice signal, is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the preceding-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage through the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control section 633a shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected to each other.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the following stage is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is increased to +5V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR21 is turned on, The switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that The transistor MTR22 turns off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage also turns off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset in the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 633.

On the other hand, when one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has the logic HI and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the preceding stage. By the input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). The withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 633.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In addition, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR23 is turned on, The switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset in the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure notice signal that has become is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is the peripheral control board. 1510 is input.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripherals. While the logic of the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 633. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs as a power failure notice signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic of the peripheral power failure advance notice signal input to the control board 1510 is inverted, and is different from the logic of the power failure advance notice signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure advance notice signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 to the main control MPU1310a. Of the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function is connected via the wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is provided. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to each other. Since it is installed in the 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the control reference voltage of +5V to notify the power outage by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage notification signal, while the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are provided. In order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a, The power outage notification is performed by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage notification signal using +12V that is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to/from the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 110 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, do not have a reset function as the main payment serial data transmission signal, which is the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 633. The main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function transmits a main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 633, and the TXB terminal transmits serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main serial output signal 1310cb without reset function is transmitted as a serial serial data transmission signal, and a main serial output signal 1310cb without reset function is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout indicating that normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above has been completed. The payer ACK signal from the control board 633 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 110 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. They are input respectively.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payment main serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 633, or a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting opening solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting opening solenoid 2404 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1404 shown in FIG. 123. Drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to each display device, and various information regarding games (game information) Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, and various information (game information) about the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function to the payout control board 633.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 via the payout control board 633, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. ing. The main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that enters a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting by using +12V which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC are built in as a communication interface circuit. It is composed mainly of).

+12V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the negative terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (electrostatic capacity: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the positive terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 110 when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs. Since the electric charge is applied as +5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41eaa and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as the main serial data.

As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using +12V which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41ea by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmitted from the shift register 1310eaa as main-circulation serial data, a main-circulation serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by +12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (3rd terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistance AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistance for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main-circulation serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 110 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR50 is turned off and the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 turns on, and the switch circuit also turns on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (6th terminal) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main-circulation serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU1511a. Input to the input terminal of.

Accordingly, as described above, when +5V supplied from the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be transmitted completely, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 receives the data without fail and without missing.

When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. Is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. Is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the +5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage +5V of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the +12V power supply line to which the communication voltage +12V applied via the diode MD50 are applied. In this case, measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. That is, with respect to the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h that is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. And a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the voltage is applied from the +12V power source line through the diode MD50 for communication. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command from being interrupted during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and to prevent the command from being lost. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command during transmission. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of the power failure or at the time of the instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are used as main-circulation serial data, and are composed of resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as interface circuits as main-cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed through the functionless main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not cut off a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and also omits them. It can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, a circuit and the like of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 118. 113 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control unit, FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 114, and FIG. 116 is a payout motor drive. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 118 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and subsequently, the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals to/from the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Discharge control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 113, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). Therefore, +5 V from the power supply board 630 is smoothed by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with the noise component removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is shut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is subject to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by the ripple removed by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is grounded to the ground (GND).

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of which is connected to the ground (GND) to form the capacitor PC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 108 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, when +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 108 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid out VBB. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 from flowing into the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, it is connected to the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM. The memory contents are retained by applying the payout VBB.

[10-2. Circuit of payout controller]
The payout control unit 633a is a peripheral circuit in addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as shown in FIG. 113. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Discharge control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The payout control system reset PIC1 has a delay capacitance terminal electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded (GND) to a grounded capacitor. It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with the reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are set. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. Note that the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Discharge control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 113, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal which is the output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, in addition to the VCC terminal. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout power outage advance signal from the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619 shown in FIG. 114, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A circuit, a handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 124, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input via the power supply substrate 630, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. It should be noted that various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, here, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) while the body 3 is closed by the body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and also the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power source line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and is also pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 has a +12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, The door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which ON/OFF is repeated for a short time.

A circuit formed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit formed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit formed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. A switch circuit that is turned on/off according to a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR23 and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. It Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor The PTR 21 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the door frame opening signal whose logic applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

As described above, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned on, so that the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed by the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. An outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is also connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power source line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 has a +12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a variation in the voltage from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short time.

A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on/off by a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619.

When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned on, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state where the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and/or The player can determine that the main frame 4 is open, which is a condition that does not occur during the normal game, and the outer terminal frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. Since the outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, the hall computer, based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal, receives the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether the main frame 4 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are opened. It is possible for the player to judge that a state that does not occur during the normal game has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned ON (for some reason). Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even when the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited by some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting the normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618′ and body frame opening switch 619′). The door frame opening switch 618′ is turned on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the body frame 4. .. The body frame opening switch 619' is turned on (conducts) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618′ is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 remains open from the main body frame 4, and for some reason, the main body is opened. Even when the frame opening switch 619′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Thus, even if the door frame opening switch 618′ and the main body frame opening switch 619′ are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line and also has resistance. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

The circuit including the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a power failure monitoring advance signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630, and when the power failure or momentary power failure is detected, there is no reset function. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 633 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12V and +24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 633, one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 633.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and +24V. At this time, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the withdrawal control board 633, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V When there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 633, and thus is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the withdrawal power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12 V and/or +24 V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of +12 V and +24 V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, the power failure notice signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout power failure notification signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power failure notification signal input to the main control MPU 1310a according to the power failure notification are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent out via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is connected to the 3rd for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 154 is for detecting whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630. In the payout control board 633, a signal that is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 633, while the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is full. , The signal applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 633.

When the storage space is not full of game balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is in the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power board 630. When the signal pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is passed through the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630, and the payout control board. At 633, the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR47, and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration is used, the detection signals from the various detection switches such as the ball cutting detection sensor 574 and the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 are output from a T-type filter circuit such as the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 154 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, as compared with the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the like provided in the dispensing device 580 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. Based on the detection signal from 154, when it is determined that the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the payout control MPU 952a is not a full tank of the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored, but the payout motor 584 has In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 584 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of the game balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 584. There is also a case where the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 584 and the payout motor 584 is overloaded and abnormally heats up to cause a failure, or a mechanism for transmitting the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 to the rotary motion of the payout rotor fails. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is first removed by the noise component in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The output terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the output terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage through the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is changed by turning on/off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the previous stage and the signal is changed as the RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. To be entered.

Further, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the preceding stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 110 is +12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the operation switch 954.

A circuit including the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and a circuit including the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is provided in the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is designed to be operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), and when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time and the error release after the power is turned on (after the period for performing the function as the RAM clear has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) It has functions and. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 serves as a RAM clear signal in the function of performing the RAM clear within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while it is after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). In the function for canceling the error in ), it becomes an error canceling signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor of the preceding stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the front-stage transistor PTR42 is turned on, and the front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, which is the voltage applied to the base of the rear-stage transistor PTR43, which is applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR43. By lowering the voltage to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR54 and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the output terminals No. 3 and No. 4 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 and the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW by pulling down the output terminal Nos. 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 to the ground (GND) side is the transistor of the preceding stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned off, and the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned off. The voltage that rises to the +5V side by the resistor PR51 turns on the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage and turns on the switch circuit in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the RWMCLR signal is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear that erases information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as described above, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, this logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction is to perform the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Discharge motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 116 will be described. As shown in FIG. 116, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power source input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power source line and the +5V power source line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 and terminal 10 of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is electrically connected to the power terminal of the payout motor 584. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12V or +5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It supplies to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and supplies to the payout motor 584.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal and 11th terminal which are collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal and 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, an excitation signal is generated. A drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 584. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC 60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation currents flowing in the respective phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the payout motor 584, and rotate the payout motor 584. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. When the back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the cathode IC of the drive ICPIC 60 in front of the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal. Adopted a circuit configuration that does.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 117 will be described. From the CR unit 6, the payout control board 633, via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as described above, is a ball rental request signal BRDY and a one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 125 and the ground LG are supplied, while the payout control board 633 connects the game ball or other lending device. Through the terminal board 869, an EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 117, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like mainly comprises photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating infrared LEDs and phototransistors).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor is also connected via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power source line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. 113 through the ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 630 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 630 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line, and a pull-up resistor (not shown) is connected. Is electrically connected to the other end of. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 630 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit including the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and the pull-up resistor PR73 pulls it to the +5V side to turn on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit also. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. It

The circuit including the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 630 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 630. It

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 630 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 630. To be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. The photocoupler PIC71 is turned on/off to change the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. The photocoupler PIC72 is turned on/off to change the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 turns off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photo coupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal that is output from the output terminal of the above through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of No. 2 through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from the input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 113, the RXD terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. To be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function as a payer serial data transmission signal. The payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function transmits a payer serial data transmission signal to the main control board 1310.

To each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout blackout notice signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) Signal 1 etc.), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying the normal reception completion of the above-mentioned payment main serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. For example, the detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 124 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to output the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, or the above-described voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the voltage switching signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 584 through the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to the above, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function is used. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 124 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. It outputs to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 633 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 633 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the payout control board 633 has the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door opening signal, etc. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 633, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And big hit information output signal such as 2 round big hit information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a power failure notice signal, and the like regarding the information are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 633 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. The award ball number information output signal output for each, the main award ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 633, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal Output signal, game information signal such as information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start mouth winning information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal and a prize ball number information output signal from the payout control board 633 side, and the main prize board number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting mouth winning information Eight signals, which are output signals, are output through (passing through) the payout control board 633.

A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hole) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the game and the like of the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots in which the round has become two (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots) and the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of big hits in the second round and the number of big hits in the 15th land from the total number of big hits. It is impossible to know whether it is a two-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play a game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some do.

However, the number of times of occurrence of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may be biased to the number of occurrences of the two rounds of jackpots in practice, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of jackpots occur. In some cases, a 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of times of occurrence of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, the player may be more excited than necessary.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the big hit information output signal, the 15-round big hit information output signal and the 2-round big hit information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the 2-round big hit. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of times of 15 rounds of big hits. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is the two-round big hit or the 15-round big hit, and the data counter has the 15-round big hit. The number of big hits and the number of big hits in the second round can be displayed separately or only the number of big hits in the 15th round can be displayed as the number of big hit game states, which may arouse the player's aspirations more than necessary. Absent.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period until the 2-round big hit occurs and is ended, and the 15-round big hit information output signal is also the 15-round big hit. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when the 2-round jackpot is generated, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. When the 15 round big hit information is output to the hall computer, the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period. Such a 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Array of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 119. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer edge frame door opening information output signal, the award ball number information output signal, the main award ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal, and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the starting mouth winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 633, It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

These various signals will be briefly described. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal does not occur during the normal game by the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. This is a signal that tells that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal, which is a signal to that effect, includes various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that tells you that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls that entered in 10 reaches 10 balls. The 15 round jackpot information output signal indicates that 15 round jackpots have occurred. 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that 2 round big hits are occurring, and probability changing information output signal is a probability changing occurrence It is a signal that tells that it is in a state, the special symbol display information output signal, the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The variable display is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped (stopped) state, and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 ( (Stopped) is a signal that conveys that it is in a state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that conveys that a time saving state has occurred, the starting mouth winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the mouth 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is a signal to that effect.

On the external terminal board 784, as shown in FIG. 119, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a line. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys that fact every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output terminal PT1 outputs for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of balls of the paid game balls and to know the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer edge frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the signal is transmitted, and is output while the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 is open from the output terminal PT2. When the outer edge frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer displays the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 while the outer edge frame door opening information output signal is being input. It can be understood that the body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the signal indicating that the state is present, in the present embodiment, from the output terminal PT3 the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 end of variable display of special symbols (stop) Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to understand that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display device 1404 or the second special symbol display device 1406, and the number of times can be counted to make the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 1404 or the second special symbol display device 1406.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start-port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start-port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer inputs the start-port winning information output signal to the first start port 2002 or the second opening of the pachinko machine 1 each time. It is possible to know that a game ball has entered the starting opening 2004, and the number of times the starting opening winning information output signal is input is counted to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is provided in black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that the 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When a 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of 15-round jackpots that have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is provided in pink and outputs a 2-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that the 2-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state and to count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of 2-round jackpot occurrences in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is a terminal which is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, 0.128 seconds is output from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the normal symbol is ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted, and the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can grasp the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs a time saving/medium time information output signal. As described above, the time saving/time saving information output signal is a signal for notifying that the time saving state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving/shortening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving/shortening information output signal is input. At the same time, the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state can be grasped by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT9 is provided in orange and outputs the information output signal during probability variation. As described above, the probability change information output signal is a signal for notifying that the probability change is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability change is occurring. It has become so. When the probability varying information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the probability varying information output signal and the probability variation occurs in the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that there is, and also to count the number of times the information output signal during probability change is input to grasp the total number of times that probability change has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball that has been balled reaches 10 balls. In the present embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the pachinko machine 1 to receive 10 balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and also to count the number of game balls to be paid out and to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. In addition, for example, game balls that are to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005. When the number of spheres of No. reaches 20 or more and the main prize sphere number information output signal is output plural times, the main prize sphere number information output signal is 0.256 (=0.128 seconds×2 times) seconds, As in the case of one continuous signal, the signals are output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 633 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control board. It is arranged so that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (passing through) the payout control board 633. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are respectively colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10 respectively, other wirings are erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the physical connection. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 633 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that the various signals output on the payout control board 633 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side do not coexist. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, in this respect also, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 633 side to the hall computer and various output on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection between the wiring for transmitting a signal to the hall computer and the wiring.

In the present embodiment, the award ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side and the main award ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively holes from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island facility side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island facility. When the 15-round big hit happens to the pachinko machine 1 at the time when the remaining amount is running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the payout is performed. (In addition, if, for example, a ball clogging or a ball scatter occurs in the payout device 580, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be eliminated). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since this is a signal that conveys that fact, the payout control board 633 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game balls cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk of the hall or the like, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle for supplying the game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and specifies the position of the ball clogging (in addition, for example, in the payout device 580. Then, the position of the ball clogging or the position of the ball scatter is specified) and the problem is solved, whereby the game ball is returned to the payout state.

However, even when the clerk in the hall is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after 15 rounds of big hits, the game balls are paid out by the clerk in the hall. When the state returns to the state in which the payout control board 633 returns to the state, the payout control board 633 sequentially pays out unplayed game balls, and the payout control board 633 is generated even though the 15 round big hit ends and the 15 round big hit does not occur. Whenever the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, an award ball number information output signal for notifying that is output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, despite the fact that the 15 round big hit has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 584 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 633 and the payout balls are actually paid out, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 633. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Whenever the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect and the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 784 are output. We adopted a mechanism that communicates to the hall computer via. As a result, even if the above-mentioned trouble (a trouble such as a ball clogging in the supply nozzle or the like, a ball clogging in the dispensing device 580, a ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the number of balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the dish unit 320. It is mainly configured by a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 120, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured by a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 generates a plus signal. The noise can be separated from the minus signal. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is restored to three synchronizing signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8 bits for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, respectively. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are the higher 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two LOCKN signal output request data, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510, are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the two signals when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to be connected as described above. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference is transmitted. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activating circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame-side production transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510 into the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and the production display drive board 4450. Is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f outputs a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input. From the side effect transmitter IC 1512d, a serial signal (serial data) by the differential method "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ and RXIN− terminals of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and then to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is, as described above, a start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zine Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the company. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. To forcefully output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different in data format from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not a device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

+3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. 109 is supplied to the VDD terminal, the VDDO terminal, the LVDSVDD terminal, the PLLVDD terminal, and the PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDS GND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminals of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, and the capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the GND terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and the +3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. Removing high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output and the VDDO terminal is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and the capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSDS terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal informs that the logic becomes HI by supplying (applying) +3.3V and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW to power down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V through the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at a rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or when it is a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and in the present embodiment, As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it becomes a state in which it cannot output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both terminals. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In a normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) including a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. This is a mode in which a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, For some reason, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) including a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 that is a damping resistance, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the above. Peripheral control MPU1511a, when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, in order to inform the effect to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Transmit to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door. You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 that is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronizing signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that informs that the data output from the data output terminals D0 to D17 are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistance SDR3 that is a damping resistance.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to the D17 terminal have three video signals (18: red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). The blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and the signal lines of the blue video signals B0 to B5 are damping resistors. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. Has become.

[13. Commands related to transmission/reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 122. 121 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 122 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 122 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 122, and FIG. 124 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the special winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. When signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 to drive the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 580) to store the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage pans. When a device for paying out game balls as a ball rental) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 121(a), a main control board. The prize ball command transmitted from the 1310 to the payout control board 633 includes commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated, and the command 11H. In the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as storage balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as ball rental balls) are installed adjacent to a game hall (hall). 1 is electrically connected to the ball lending machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 121(b), the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633. The command 20H to the command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the player. The command 20H designates one prize ball, the command 21H designates two prize balls, and the command 2EH designates the prize. 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 121(c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to CR machines and general machines, and self-check is designated in this command 30H. By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether or not the ACK signal is input, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 633 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 123, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 122, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 99. Concerning the first special symbol display 1404, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “A*H” is assigned as the status and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the special figure entrainment effect start in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 1 specification command is for specifying a deviant, a specific big hit, or a non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the variation state designation command is an instruction to specify the probability and the time saving state. The probability and the time saving state include a low probability time saving state that indicates a low probability state and a time saving state, a high probability time saving state that indicates a high probability state that is a time saving state, and a low probability. It is composed of a low-probability non-time saving state that indicates a state that is not a time saving state, and a high probability non-time saving state that indicates that a state is a high probability state that is not a time saving state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high-probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low-probability state (normal game state), and the short-time state is, for example, an ordinary symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), the time for displaying symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, so that the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery described later in the predetermined time can be displayed. In addition to increasing the number of stop displays compared to the non-time saving state, further increasing the acceptance rate (entering rate) of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 to obtain a special symbol lottery without reducing the number of balls held. (In other words, compared with the non-time saving state, the number of decisions on whether to open/close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and when opening/closing the pair of movable pieces, opening/closing of the pair of movable pieces is performed. It is a state in which the acceptance rate (entering rate) of the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 is increased by lengthening the operation period.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 1 variation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 122, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 123. Concerning the second special symbol display 1406, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the special figure entrainment effect start in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 fluctuation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 122, the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, "C*H" is assigned as the status, and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The big hit opening command is an instruction to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is a big winning opening 1 opening start of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting mouth unit 2100 shown in FIG. 99). Is to open or start the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during closing of the large winning opening 1 (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is closed or starts to be closed between rounds, and the special winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of 0 to 10 gaming balls (shown in FIG. 123). It conveys the number of game balls that entered the special winning opening 2005 detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403. The big hit ending command is an instruction to start the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is , Is a command to display the big hit symbol information.

The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during the small hit, the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is open or The small hit count display command is a command for displaying the small hit, and the small hit medium-large prize hole winning effect (the game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 during the small hit is detected by the big winning sensor 2403). The small hit ending command is an instruction to start a small hit ending.

As a transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 When the special winning opening 2005 is opened in the Nth round), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is closed), The special winning opening 1 count display command is issued when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened and the special winning opening 2005 is entered) Is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, the big hit symbol display command is when the big winning opening is opened (the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). (When opened).

The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium to large winning opening (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403), and the small hit ending is performed. The command is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 122, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command at the time of power-on main control return destination. A status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state. The power-on state command is for the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 at the time of power-on (including power-on and power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs to restore power). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and information at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored) .), information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is used for recovery. , And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, when creating so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type, which game copyright it belongs to, what game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like. In other words, the model code information of the pachinko machine is a series code for identifying which type is the max type, the middle type, and the sweet digital type indicating the model type, and for identifying the copyright of the work. Copyright code, and game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, probability changes in a state where the number of changes of special symbols is limited And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 123 and information indicating the driving state of the special winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. It is configured.

As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control recovery destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (when power is restored, power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure) Including.) is sent. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when a power failure or a momentary power failure is restored, a main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 123, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 123, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 123. Concerning 1402, it is composed of commands with the names "general figure synchronization effect start", "general pattern designation", "general figure synchronization effect end", and "variation state designation". These various commands are assigned status "E*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The universal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing to start the universal figure synchronization effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the universal pattern specification command is for specifying a falling edge, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the general figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time saving state are a low probability time saving state that indicates a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time saving that indicates a high probability state and a time saving state. State, a low-probability non-time saving state that indicates a low-probability state that is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state that is not a short-time state (normally As a gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time elapses (ordinary symbol is determined), the state change command at the time of variation is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Normal electric role production related]
The normal electric-role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that can be opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 99, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. It consists of a command called the opening, the opening of the public train, and the end of the map. These various commands are assigned status "F*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The universal figure opening command is for instructing to start the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (a pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2404). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per universal map, and the universal power open display command is transmitted when the universal power is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the starter solenoid 2404 to move to the left or right). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the notification display category is made up of commands including winning prize display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The prize-winning abnormality display command is issued when the player hits the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). Is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When there is a temporary connection abnormality, the instruction to start the connection abnormality notification is given, and the disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, When the disconnection/short circuit of the electrical connection with the special winning opening sensor 2403 or the like occurs, it is for instructing to start the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is the magnetic detection shown in FIG. 123. When an abnormality occurs in the sensor 4024, it is instructed to start the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification.

In addition, the door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input through the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is in the opened state, the door frame is instructed to notify the door opening, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When the door is in the opened state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued by the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input through the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. In the case where the main body frame 4 is opened, the main body frame closing command is issued, and the main body frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

As a transmission timing of these various commands, a prize abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 633 when the command is sent to the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor. Any of the 2403 and the like is sent when any one of them is broken or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the opened state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 633, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command from the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. 124, “7*H” is set. The status is set, and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, it adds the additional information “7*H” to these received commands. Is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The trimmed frame status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and when the error is cleared, the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared, and the frame status 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 123, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. The status "8*H" and the mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are allocated to this test command ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 105). Various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194 are inspected.

As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on, and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at the time of recovery from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 is operated, the main control side power-on process described below is performed. The test command is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is executed.

[13-2-10. Other]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 123, starting mouth winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect. A status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command is It is for instructing the state transition from the shortened operating state to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4 special symbols 1 reserved (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and is still used for the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls that have not been played (the number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 memory command is 0-4 special symbols 2 held (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol (the number of holdings), and the ordinary symbol storage command is the ordinary symbol 1 hold 0-4. In order to convey the number of balls (the number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game balls have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8) Yes, the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command, before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol 1 is held in advance. Based on the first special symbol display device 1404 is to instruct the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command, the special symbol 2 hold is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1406, it pre-reads to instruct a pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1406 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when a game ball enters the first starting mouth 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 3002, When a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting opening sensor 2402), the speaker 622 shown in FIG. 72 and the upper speaker 464 shown in FIG. The command for designating the end of fluctuation reduction is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation has been fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions has been completed (after the elapse of the deviant stop period). "High probability N times" is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after digesting the high-probability number of times (after the elapse stop period), the special symbol 1 memory command, when the special symbol 1 operation reserve ball number change (In the state where the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of holdings not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400, the first starting port is further. When the game ball enters 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases from the number of holdings used for variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1404), it is transmitted. Special symbol 2 memory command, when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 is still in the variable display of the special symbol In the state where there is a hold number that is not used, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the hold number increases, and the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1406 from the hold number. It is sent to when the number of holdings is reduced), and the normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400). In the state that there is a pending number that is not yet used in the variable display of the normal symbol in the device 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the pending number increases, or from the reserved number in the normal symbol display device 1402. Usually used for variable display of the number of holdings when it is reduced) is transmitted, the special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command, when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding ball increases (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002) When the number of balls held is increased, the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbols 2 operation reserved balls increases (the number of game balls entered into the second starting opening 2004 is the number held). (When increased) will be sent. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is, when the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or the second starting opening). When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2402), the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in (1) uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 is used not only to notify by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-port winning command and does not notify by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 633 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 124, each command from the payout control board 633 is divided into commands of a frame state 1, an error release navigation and a frame state 2, and the frame state 1, the error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) is prepared for out of ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when out of ball Represents a bit.), the value 1 is set in the full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) has a ball ball, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to the value 1, and the payout detection sensor On error, bit 3 (B3) is set to the value 1, and on retry error, bit 4 (B4) is set to the value 1. Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

In the frame state 2 command, a ball being cut out is prepared, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball cutting. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 125 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on process, and FIG. 127 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach when the big hit game state is not generated The random number for reach determination to be used for the determination, and the variation for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 1404 and the second special symbol display device 1406 shown in FIG. Random number for the display pattern, a big hit symbol for use in determining the big hit symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 when generating the big hit game state, and this big hit Random number for determining the initial value of the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol, when the small hit game state is generated, it is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 1404 and the second special symbol display device 1406. Random numbers for small hit symbols to be used for determining small hit symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small hit symbols to be used for determining initial values of the random numbers for small hit symbols, etc. are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, it is also used to determine the normal symbol per determination random number for use in determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 and the initial value of this normal symbol per determination random number. For the normal symbol per determination for initial value determination random number, and the normal symbol variable display pattern random number for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

Among various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, whereas other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the hard random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 110), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main-control-internal hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main-control MPU 1310a makes a big hit on the value extracted by the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main-control internal hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol per determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter usually counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining per symbol toward the maximum value, and then from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determining per symbol normal. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hitting determination random number, the normal symbol hitting determination initial value determining random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for the symbol hit determination. ..

In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum is stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off). When the entire area of the main control internal RAM is cleared, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol is normally the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and usually derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for symbol determination based on the taken-out ID code. It is executed so that the derived fixed value is set. That is, as for the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored in the ID code, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM. The second security measure for deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two-step security measure for prevent the analysis.

Here, the advantage of using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination will be described from the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for determination of the normal symbol and the normal determination value for the symbol coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the numbers are attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting judgment random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless on the other game board 5′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1′, and thus is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 99 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a game state in which the game ball can be accepted in 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after ending the subroutine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the main control program described above performs the main power supply side power-on process as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be updated.

Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 154 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as " WDT control register”) to set a timer setting value to activate the main control built-in WDT 1310af and reset the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, and by the time the counted time reaches the time set by the timer set value, the watchdog timer clear register ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time counting by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time counting is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clear process (step S14). In this power outage clearing process, first, the output of the power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 111 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between +24V and the reference voltage or by comparing the voltage between +12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power failure clearing process, first, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e starts outputting the power failure clearing signal to start outputting the power failure clearing signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca with its logic set to LOW. To be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is applied. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the power outage clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Has been done. Whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with its logic being HI from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. To be entered. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC22 in the latched state. The D type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state in which the logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal thereof is latched.

Subsequent to step S14, the main control program sets a state in which the RAM clear processing for initializing the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633. It is done depending on whether or not it has been done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and operates the operation switch 954. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16 (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above indicates whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag that indicates and is set to a value of 1 when erasing the game information and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the process waits until the system for performing the drawing control of the effect display device 1600 and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 126 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) until booting.

Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When the power failure notice signal is input in the determination of step S24, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure notice signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

When the power failure notice signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and holds game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control internal RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as the power recovery time ( Step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being turned off, the state in which power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, fraudulent person A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value of the checksum (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. , Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, the main control program executes the entire main control RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Instead of this, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the ROM with built-in main control as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a, the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is for instructing the RAM clear, when deleting the game information, when the thumb value does not match, or the main control side power off processing When not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the normal symbol per determination random number based on the taken out ID code. Always perform the initial value derivation process that derives the same fixed value from, and set this fixed value to the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol per determination, which is used to determine the initial value of the above random number for the ordinary symbol. To do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510). ), the communication serial speed prescaler and the presence/absence of parity are set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a test facility of a gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Subsequent to step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 154 (step S48). Here, a hard random number control register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the big hit determination random number, which is used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state among the various random numbers related to the game, by hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and obtaining a random number, the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131). Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value within the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a big hit determination random number.

Subsequent to step S48, the main control program sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in (1) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt period set in step S42.

Subsequent to step S52, the main control program outputs an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when main processing on the main side is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal time operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954, as described above, for the error release navigation command for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. RAM clear processing is executed upon input (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, execution of RAM clear processing is restricted even if the error clear navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as the game storing unit instead of the power-on for a predetermined time. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later) is caused to function as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, or after a predetermined time has elapsed, a game is played. It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When no power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In the non-win/win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning/judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-win/win random number updating process.

Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. Then, step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clearing processing in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Subsequent to step S60, the main control program is the starting opening solenoid 2404, the special winning opening sensor 2405, the first special symbol display device 1404, the second special symbol display device 1406, and the first special reserved number display shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the device 1405, the second special reserved number display 1407, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the state display 1401, the round display 1408, etc. is stopped (step S62).

Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Subsequent to step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. Since it becomes impossible to do so, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power restoration.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off processing is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

Here, description will be made on the point that the presence/absence of the power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, in the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent process is performed Described below are the problems.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. In other words, even if the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5 V causes the power from the pachinko island equipment to be applied. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main control side main processing or main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, a power outage or momentary power outage occurs from pachinko island equipment. When the power is shut off, the main control side power shutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, the system for performing the drawing control of the effect display device 1600 and the rendering display device 1600 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If a standby time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in the present embodiment) before starting (booting), and if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the standby time Although the electric charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then, By performing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed, and even if the content of the main control internal RAM is updated, the main control power is turned off in the main control power-on processing. Sometimes it may not be possible to complete the processing. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the content of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the power-on process on the main control side is started again when power is restored.

Then, at the time of power recovery this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of the above is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention of the hall clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that it will be done.

In view of this, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power cut notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the content of the main control internal RAM (game information) is not changed at all.

As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, the step When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process in S22 (when it is determined in the determination in step S24), the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. This cannot be done and it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the result of the checksum calculation does not fluctuate. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the calculated and stored checksum value of step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure that is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game, the pachinko machine Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information according to the progress of this game by supplying power to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of Step S58 to Step S68 and the main control side power-off processing constituted by an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a's main processing is completed. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the calculated checksum value in step S64). Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are reset. While the main control-side power-off processing can be started again without updating at all, while immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, As described above, it is possible to surely complete the power-off processing on the main control side within the "power supply securing period during an instantaneous power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms due to hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the power-on process at the time of main control side power recovery, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or the instantaneous blackout. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power interruption or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after that, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power outage notice signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeating the above determination, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and then again. Since it becomes impossible to start timing, the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, so that the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Adopted the mechanism. When the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information) are covered by software and the main control side power supply is not changed at all. The contents of the main control built-in RAM are configured by dividing into two parts, the part covered by hardware so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all by surely completing the disconnection process ( It is possible to reliably prevent (game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, the fact that the power is turned on (power recovery) is performed. For transmission, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 122 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2404 and information for instructing the driving state of the special winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. 43. Has been done. Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information for instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2404 and information for instructing the driving state of the special winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. 122. The problem in the case where there is no such problem, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted at the time of power-on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, while the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 100, the main control board 1310 is the special winning opening. When the sensor 2405 is driven and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99 is opened by the opening/closing member, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 causes the main control in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, and the special winning opening sensor 2405 The driving of the special winning opening 2005 is started and the state in which the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member is changed to the open state.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the shortened state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as a game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, the jackpot gaming state. It is not possible to display which round of the round. That is, for example, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Although the number of balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round (that is, how many rounds) of the big hit game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the special winning opening sensor 2405 and ends the special winning opening 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107 when, for example, ending the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game state. From the main control board 1310, a special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, starting closing between the rounds of the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round of the big hit game state (fifth round), the big winning opening sensor 2405 is started and the big winning opening 2005 is opened/closed by the opening/closing member 2107. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of a special winning opening opening fifth display command for instructing the transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, starting opening the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005) Send to substrate 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the fifth round in the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, for example, a screen informing that the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is advantageous to the player (for example, the fact that the movable piece is expanded is displayed). While the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen (which is transmitted to the player) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2404 to expand the state. When an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34 to set the work area of the main control internal RAM at the time of power recovery. Based on the information, by restoring to the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2404 is started, and the pair of movable pieces rises in a substantially vertical direction from the left to the right. It will move to the expanded state.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed and returned to the display area of the effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second start opening 2004 is entered, and a game state advantageous to the player is displayed. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball was received at the second start opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. It may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, it is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, since the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored, the game There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly restored after the power restoration. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power restoration, power restoration is also performed when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 122. Are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, in the four rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main winning opening sensor 2405 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the big winning opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening/closing member 2107. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the transition to the state being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen specifying that it is four rounds of the big hit game state (that is, how many rounds it is). Although the screen shown) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the jackpot game state is started, the driving of the special winning opening sensor 2405 is started, and the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. (For example, a screen that tells the player a message "It's a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game ball so that it enters the big winning opening.") Can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to instruct the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine to play a game ball into the special winning opening 2005 after power recovery. In the above-described example, when the game ball is ready to be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored. As a return destination of the main control board 1310, a screen for informing that the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2404 is started to expand the pair of movable pieces in the left-right direction (for example, “Moveable piece is expanded”). The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message that tells the player the message "Please enter the game ball into the lower start opening." in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the pachinko machine is displayed. A player sitting on the front of the machine can be instructed to enter a game ball into the second starting opening 2004 after power recovery. This allows the main control board 1310 side to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum in step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values should not match, and the entire area of the main control internal RAM must be cleared in step S38. Accordingly, when the reservation of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is set in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 122 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, that is, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted information as the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in the state stored in. In these commands, a power-on state command is transmitted first, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 124 at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 is operated to perform the RAM clear is shown, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case of turning on the power, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is reduced). (Including when power is restored), in any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) It is composed of information instructing whether or not to perform and information indicating a model code of the pachinko machine. Here, there will be described a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine refers to the copyright of which work when the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like) in which the probability variation occurs after being played 30 or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for which of the copyrights of the plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of movie D). Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 may be used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which product copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs to, and which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) is selected for the same product copyright. It is also not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, in the production line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, when the main control boards 1310 are mixed when the main control boards 1310 are mixed, the main control boards for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, the time when power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. Are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspecting step, which is the inspecting step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection device is controlled by the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code for specifying which type is the sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the probability variation occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited, Based on the above, by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the copyright of the main control board 1310 belongs to, and also to confirm the copyright of the same work. What kind of model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if probability changes occur, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspecting step of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually checking the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from decreasing due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 125 and 126.

When the main control timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 127 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine, the first register bank to the second register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process is changed to the second register bank. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display device 1404 and the second special symbol display device 1406 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, the ordinary condition described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric auditors product control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 633. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the message has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variable display pattern or the normal symbol variable display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0, whereby the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 shown in FIG. 102 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201 shown in FIG. 99, and FIG. The game signal which entered into the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 102 is detected from the special winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. 102, and the game ball which entered into the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 99 is detected. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 102, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102 which detects the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. , A detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 102 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 99, and a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which informs that the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 102 has normally received the detection signal and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later, is read, and the input information is read. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004. When each of the signals is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 102 and corresponding thereto is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 3002, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting mouth sensor 2402. Then, the starting mouth winning command corresponding thereto is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, the big winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game balls that entered the big winning opening 2005. From the first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate sensor 2003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). 2) After the elapse of time, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. Due to the effect of chattering, noise, etc., by performing a total of two double readings, the second reading for comparing the first to third times and the second reading for comparing for the second to fourth times. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401 are detected. The reliability can be increased.

Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number updating process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned big hit symbol random number and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 126, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small hit symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, to further enhance randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only when the winning random number update process is performed. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time this main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hitting determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determining random number is updated by this winning random number updating process. The random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for the symbol hit determination. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not included in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning random number updating process and the winning random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated. However, each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven, and When the number of times the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 is executed by randomly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer of is generated, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number , And the small hit symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 121 for paying out the game ball based on this input information is created and the prize ball is paid out. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to inform that effect, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area as the output information. The self-check command shown in FIG. 121 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball. Since the number of balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to inform that fact, the result is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. Alternatively, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is confirmed. For example, a self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633. As in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, when the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10, the number of balls that has exceeded the number of the next game balls In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on the input information, and the number of the added game balls is added. When is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that effect, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 633, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 122 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to inform the payout control board 633 of that fact is stored as output information in the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a command of 2 bytes (16 bits) (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 102 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation) The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraudulent activity detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the big hit game state is not entered (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005), etc. In this case, a prize-winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 102 is created as an abnormal state, and is stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 102, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as the big hit determination random number. Whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance match. Whether or not to determine (whether to generate a big hit game state (called "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter for updating the big hit symbol random number is stored in advance in the main control ROM It is determined whether or not the probability variation hit determination value matches (determination as to whether or not a probability variation occurs). Here, the “probability change” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the above-described big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and the value is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 is set in the high probability. A value 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step S114, a big hit determination random number (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in When it is determined whether or not the big hit determination value stored in the ROM in advance matches, a big hit determination random number (that is, a random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). It is performed depending on whether or not is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, while the lottery result is based on the second starting port sensor 2402. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 is set to light the device 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. To do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as the big hit related items shown in FIG. 122 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 Create a closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command, and store it in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or open/close the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 99. When the output of the drive signal to the special winning opening sensor 2405 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times. The output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp 1407a is set so as to light the two-round display lamp 1407a of the round display 1408 shown in FIG. When it is the time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to turn on the 15-round display lamp 1407b of the round display device 1408 shown in FIG. 10, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so as to light the presence or absence of the probability variation in a predetermined color, and the output is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination is extracted and the gate information is stored as the gate information storage area in the main control RAM. Remember.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage and the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the second section. The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is used so that the total number of the stored gate information is set as the holding sphere and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination value matches (called "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not the movable piece is opened/closed is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction, and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined on the basis of the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified in relation to the universal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and as described above as the output information. Stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, various commands related to the normal electric power combination effect shown in FIG. 122. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2404 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination taken out does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol variation is based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above. The display pattern is determined, various commands classified as related to the universal figure entrainment effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, and are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and normally according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern. Normally, the output of the lighting signal to the symbol display 1402 is set so as to turn on the symbol display 1402, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is issued to the payout control board 633. Or output a drive signal to the special winning opening sensor 2405 that opens/closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005 when the game is in the big hit mode, or drives the starting opening solenoid 2404 that opens/closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting signals, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as a signal, a time saving information output information, a starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 633.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads the transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine shown in FIG. 122 and classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related and special figure 2 tuning effect-related Based on the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 (see FIG. 102) when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 99) is detected. A special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the special winning opening count command), various commands classified into power-on, various commands classified into general figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified into ordinary electric character performance related, Various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, main frame opening command, main frame closing command, etc.) classified into the notification display and various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, shown in FIG. 102). The error release navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as other are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main circumference serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main circumference serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as described above. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310aa built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41eaa and the transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as main circumference serial data. At the time of power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is recovered, in order to inform the power recovery in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power on shown in FIG. 122 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. , A main-cycle serial data, which constitutes a power-on state command, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitutes a power-on main control return destination command, status, The information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, the game information is read from the game backup information and the game information is responded to. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control unit Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to () (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 124 received from the payout control substrate 633 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 123.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 633 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control substrate 633 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 633 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 is executed. A main frame opening command (second main frame opening command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (main frame command sending means, second main frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control substrate 633 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 633 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control substrate 633 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 633 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control A door opening command (second door frame opening command) to the unit) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control substrate 633 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 633 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) A door closing command (second door closing command) to the (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control substrate 633 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 102 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the timing, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af does not force the main control MPU 1310a to be reset.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. It can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. 122, the peripheral control of the power-on main control return destination command of FIG. 122 for instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2404 and the special winning opening sensor 2405 which are the electric driving sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. It is possible to output to the substrate 1510. In other words, the main control board 1310 is mainly used for setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process of reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status command and power-on main command classified into power-on in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command as main circumference serial data. , The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted in this order to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value that constitute the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to. For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, the return destination of the progress of the game display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect can be displayed in. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power failure or power outage and then recovers power, the player immediately returns to the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure. In addition to being able to perform, it is possible to notify the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 by displaying the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a lumped state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has broken down. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed.

Further, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 of the power-on process on the main control side, all areas of the main control internal RAM must be cleared. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, if the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 122. And a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, so that two commands, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, are stored. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main circumference serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order, and then the main control return destination command is configured when the power is turned on. Send to process inspection equipment. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code for identifying (machine) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[15. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 144. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process of the payout control unit, FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the process at the power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 128, and FIG. 127 is a payout control unit following FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a continuation of power-on processing, FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing, FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of rotation detection sensor history creation processing, and FIG. 133 is a sprocket. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of fixed position determination skip processing, FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of ball gliding determination processing, and FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. Reference numeral 136 is a flow chart showing an example of the process for adding the number of stock balls for awarding balls, FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing an example of the stock monitoring process, and FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of payout setting processing, FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of ball-bending operation setting processing, FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of retry operation monitoring processing, and FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process, FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of an error cancellation operation determination process, and FIG. 144 is a signal process (a) at the time of a payout operation by a ball lending, from the CR unit. 5 is a timing chart showing the input signal confirmation processing (a) of FIG.

First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt process, ball removal switch operation determination process, rotation detection sensor history creation process, sprocket fixed position determination skip process, ball gaze determination process, award Ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball gaze movement determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball gaze movement setting processing, retry movement monitoring processing, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball glide determination processing, prize ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball gaze action determination process, the retry action monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error cancellation operation determination process are one of the main action setting processes of step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. It is performed as a processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball deviation determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error cancellation operation determination processing, prize ball award ball number The priority order is set in the order of the addition process, the prize ball stock number addition process for renting a ball, the stock monitoring process, and the pay-out-ball tilt motion determination setting process.

[15-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program turns on the power of the payout control unit under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIGS. 128 to 127. Perform time processing. When the process at power-on of the payout control unit is started, the payout control program causes the payout control MPU 952a to set the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 952a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a are set.

Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A warning signal (payment blackout warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time of power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitor circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 954 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform the RAM clear, and the operation switch is determined. While it is determined that the operation switch 954 is not operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and the operation switch 954 is operated. judge.

When the operation switch 954 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 952a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (power-on operation control means on the payout control side). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control internal RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 952a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, The award ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the award ball information storage area and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area It is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. for which the state is set is erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. To be done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program sets to permit access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

Following step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (power-off) to be described later. (Step S526). When they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and a checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process of the payout control unit described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as the time of power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, the value 0 is set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM (hereinafter referred to as “the payout control built-in ROM”) built in the payout control MPU 952a. Then, this power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Thereby, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, a prize stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. The term "power recovery" includes not only the state where the power is turned off and the state where the power is turned on, but also the state where the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step In S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the payout control program causes all areas of the payout control internal RAM to be filled. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clearing process upon detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program sets interruption permission (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal (payment power failure notice signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is sent as the power failure warning to the main control board 1310. Is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When no power failure notice signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

When the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not the power outage notice signal (payout power outage notice signal) is input. To judge.

On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S546, the payout control program performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 121) are normally received, and the payout motor 584. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control to the player, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a based on the output information, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the payout motor is issued. The drive signal is output to 584, or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is actually 10). Each time a game ball is paid out, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 558. Specifically, a prize ball number information signal output determination counter for outputting prize ball number information is provided. This prize ball number information signal output determination counter indicates the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out by the payout motor 584 from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input processing of step S550 described later. Based on the detection signal of, the payout motor 584 stores in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. The process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 584 is a prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the signal output determination counter based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input processing of step S550 described later. In step S548, the value of the award ball number information signal output determination counter is read from the award ball information storage area, and the value of the read award ball number information signal output determination counter exceeds the value 10. During this time, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 558, and the number of exceeded balls is used as the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter to store the prize ball information in the payout control RAM. The memory is updated in the area ing. ), and outputs a display signal to the error LED display 860b.

Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 952a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, the operation signal of the operation switch 954, the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection. The signal, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later have been normally received by the main control board 1310, and the like are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. To do.

Subsequent to step S550, the payout control program performs timer updating processing (step S552). In this timer updating process, when determining whether or not the blunted state of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined, the bluntness determination which is set as the determination condition is performed. Time, skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 803 Time, full tank determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. The out-of-ball determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is a predetermined number or more based on the detection signal from the sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as, etc., the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 do not match due to inconsistency. Time management of the inconsistency counter reset determination time that is set as the determination condition when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not paying out game balls is repeated I do. For example, when the ball-judging determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-judging determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update processing is performed, and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball-blurring judgment time is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the out-of-ball determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer updating process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball outage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms. The removal determination time, full tank determination time, out-of-ball determination time, and mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured. The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. The payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6.
In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the signal logic state is set.

By this processing, for example, even after an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. Thereby, even when the payout device 580 is performing the payout operation of the game balls, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power restoration. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU 952a, in the CR communication process, exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 and while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, a momentary power failure or a power failure CR Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, the number of prize balls stock PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC at power recovery By restoring the values such as, etc. to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU952a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. It is like this.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop even when the power is restored, even if the power is stopped or stopped. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of a momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control RAM in step S530. When the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. It outputs to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of MPU952a. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. That is, that is, the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and the payout ball gaze operation determination process is performed. As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when the communication with the CR unit 6 is not performed, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible is set. The PRDY signal output setting information is set and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. To the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, when the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored at the time of power restoration, so it is extremely early after power restoration. At the stage, the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout to the CR unit 6 is performed. It is possible to inform that the payout operation of the game balls by the device 580 is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, the payout ball is paid out. In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected to each other via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, the ball is paid out. In order to inform that the payout operation for the payout is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the input information by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the above-mentioned payout device 580 is a predetermined number or more based on the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. It determines whether or not. For example, to determine whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, the timer interruption period of 2 ms is used to detect the full tank and the out-of-ball check process at this time. When the detection signal from the sensor 154 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is When transitioning from OFF to ON, the time counting of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing? Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the gaming space in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full is described above as the status information. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full tank information indicating that the game space in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is not full is stored in the state information storage area area. To do.

To determine whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the timer interruption period of 2 ms is used to cut the ball in the full tank and ball out check processing this time. When the detection signal from the detection sensor 574 is ON, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) and the ball cutting check process, that is, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. When is changed from OFF to ON, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball cut information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is a predetermined number or more is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not more than a predetermined number, and the ball is cut off. Information is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control program performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 121) are received.
When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not normally received, the connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is abnormal (various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control program performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control program performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main action setting process, action settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal, and ball scooping are performed, retry actions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. To do.

Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various kinds of information are read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 633 is created, and are stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this ball-out information, when the number of balls in the game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the corresponding display data ( In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number “1”) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control program performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main frame open) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 122 based on this various information. A main control board 1310 is created by creating a command, a main frame closing command, a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command), an error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error releasing command) and a frame state 2 command). Send to. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of balls in the game ball taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number, a frame state 1 command is created. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 1310. Further, in this command transmission process, this payout control program, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error relating to the payout operation of the game ball, information relating to the location where the error occurred regarding this payout operation (hereinafter A frame state 1 command (first error cancellation command) including "error occurrence position information" is generated (error occurrence command generating means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, if the payout control program has the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG having a value 1, that is, if an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 954 is detected, the above-mentioned error occurs. A cancel navigation command (first error cancel command) is output (command sending means). Further, this payout control program transmits a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) when the body frame opening detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619 is input (body frame command sending means, 1 body frame command sending means). (I) This payout control program transmits a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) when the body frame closing detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619 is input (body frame command sending means). , First body frame command sending means). When the door frame opening detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, the payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means). On the other hand, when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, this payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means). In the command transmission process (step S566), the payout control program reads the error information including the error content from the state information storage area described above, and detects the machine number information for identifying itself from another pachinko machine and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. Upon receipt of this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned unit number information and error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall store clerk, and the hall store clerk uses the unit number pachinko machine based on this unit number information. In, it is possible to recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

After step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and checks in step S540 whether the power outage notice signal (payout outage notice signal) is input. If it is determined that this power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) is not input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If it is, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548. , Step S550 performs port input processing, step S552 performs timer update processing, step S554 performs CR communication processing, step S556 performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing, and step S558 performs command reception processing. Command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, and a value is stored in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568. C is set, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 952a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 952a preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a secures the processing time so as to be able to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-mentioned payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). The clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program sets the prohibition of access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 952a is reset, and thereafter, the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the endless loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) is reset at the time of a power failure or momentary power failure, and performs the power-on processing of the payout controller by power recovery thereafter.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[15-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 128 to 129.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 131 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Registers are switched (saved) (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). The value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten by using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Subsequent to step S594, the payout control program sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15-3. Rotation detection sensor history creation processing]
Next, the rotation detection sensor history creation process will be described. In this rotation detection sensor history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 is created.

When the rotation detection sensor history creation process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program detects the rotation from the payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is stored in the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area.

Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program detects that the rotation detection sensor 840 detects the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. It is determined that the axis has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

In step S612, when the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is transited from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, the payout control program shifts the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S614). In this shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is used as the most significant bits B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2. , B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

Following step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S618). .. In this shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the payout control program performs the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information in step S614, and the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. The most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. Shift 1 bit at a time.

Following step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

Thus, every time this rotation detection sensor history creation processing is performed, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is rotated. The value 1 or the least significant bit B0 is set to the least significant bit B0 depending on the state in which the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 transits from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 can be created.

[15-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game balls by the payout device 580 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 can be reliably started in a state where no ball is generated.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing is started, in the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. 133, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to perform the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body, and when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), the payout rotation is 1. The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when not skipped).

In step S630, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (when not skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program causes the rotation detection sensor history information of the payout control internal RAM to be detected. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“B” represents a bit.”” in the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits have a value of 0 and the lower 4 are. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. Means a state in which the transition from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. When the timer interrupt cycle is generated four times, the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 124 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 584 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but the backlash causes the payout rotating body to rotate. The rotation is designed so as to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 584 in about two steps. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when performing the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body, the rotation detection sensor 840 outputs the rotation. History of detection signals, rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation detection sensor history creation processing shown in FIG. 132, and lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, This is performed based on the detection signal from the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 584 is rotated by four steps, and therefore the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash is greater than that of the payout rotor. Therefore, the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash is absorbed. You can Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, so that the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 584. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (=2 ms×4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program is The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S636). Accordingly, it is possible to set not to perform (skip) the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The payout control MPU 952a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

Following step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same number as the concave portions of the payout rotating body, and is formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection plate. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 584 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 584 in 18 steps.

The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 584 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Specifically, (1) a transition state (referred to as an “edge detection state”) in which the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, and (2) the detection slit detects rotation. A state in which the optical axis of the sensor 840 transits from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position confirmation state”) and (3) the detection slit transits the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. The state is managed in three states, that is, a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 584, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to four rotations of the payout motor 584, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 584 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the respective detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection plate, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by the rotation of a total of 18 steps.

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 transits from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (=2 ms×13 steps).

When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. The payout control MPU 952a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction is 0, sets the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG to the initial value 0.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S630 (when skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step 3 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. .. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 802 and the tank rail 803, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580, and guided to the payout device 580. When the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the dispensing device 580 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The payout device 580 is provided with a rotation detection sensor 840, and the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-described (3) fixed position determination skip state, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. This improves the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The cycle and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be calculated in advance as described above, and therefore the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-5. Ball Judgment Processing]
Next, the ball gaze determination processing will be described. In the ball-blurring determination processing, it is determined whether or not the ball-blurred state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is generated.

When the ball gaze determination process is started, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program is The detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and it is assumed that the ball-bulging state does not occur, and this routine is finished as it is. To do.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the sphere is seen. The value 1 is set to the medium flag PBE-FLG (step S644). The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When the payout motor 584 is performing an overturning operation, the value is 1, The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

Following step S644, the payout control program sets the ball entrainment determination time to valid (step S646), and ends this routine. When the ball gaze determination time becomes valid, the ball gaze determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. ..

[15-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, a process for adding various prize ball stock numbers will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes a prize ball stock number addition processing and a ball rental prize ball stock number addition processing. The prize ball stock number addition processing is performed from the main control board 1310. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. The process of adding the number of prize ball stock for ball rental is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and subsequently, the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental will be described. In the present embodiment, the award ball stock number addition process for award balls is set to be preferentially performed, and the award ball stock number addition process according to the award ball stock number addition process for award balls is performed according to the award ball stock number addition process. After the game balls have been paid out by the payout device 580, it is set to perform the prize ball stock number addition process for ball rental.

[15-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a to display the prize ball command as shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is any (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether the command is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not the prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the received command information is the prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program changes to this prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The award ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the award ball command and the award ball number PBV.

Following step S652, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control internal RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the payout device 580, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. There is. As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. The prize ball command read out in step S650 after addition in step S656 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[15-6-2. Addition processing for the number of award balls for ball rental]
Next, the award ball stock number addition process for renting a ball will be described. When this award ball stock number addition process for renting balls is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is made based on the ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a ball rental request signal.

When there is no ball-renting request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when there is a ball-renting request signal in step S660, the payout control program is the prize ball information in the above-mentioned payout control RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the number of lent balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the award ball is prioritized (the award ball and the ball rental are distinguished and managed), the ball rental request signal is held even when there is a ball rental request signal. The payout of balls will be made upon completion of the payout of prize balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of the lent balls is performed after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes 0.

[15-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. In this stock monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the player continues to play the game while the tank is filled with the game balls in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is stored. It is a process to do.

When the stock monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The cautionary threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, the value 50 is set as the cautionary threshold value TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 1 (step S674), and ends this routine. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started stocking game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270, and the number of unpaid game balls (the above-mentioned number of prize balls stock) has exceeded the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that it has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when it has reached the caution threshold TH or higher, and to a value of 0 when it has not reached the caution threshold TH or higher.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 0 (step S676), and ends this routine.

When the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and pays attention to the effect unfolded on the effect display device 1600 and shown in FIG. 105, the player inadvertently pays as a prize ball for one round. In some cases, the game ball that has been put out may not be pulled out from the lower plate 322 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls start to accumulate in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH, which is provided on the door frame 3 as a caution effect. Multiple LEDs on various decorative boards flash. By this blinking, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is paying attention to the game. As a result, the clerk of the hall can inform the player that the game ball is removed from the lower plate 322, and the player can fill the lower plate 322 (the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270) with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

In the present embodiment, the cautionary threshold value TH is set to a value 50, which is approximately one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the player should pay attention to the game at the earliest possible stage.

[15-8. Dispensing Ball Gaze Movement Judgment Setting Process]
Next, the payout ball tilting motion determination setting process will be described. In the payout ball gaze operation determination setting process, the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 by the payout motor 584, the ball gaze operation is performed, or such payout or discharge is not performed. This is the process of setting either of them.

When the pay-out ball tilting motion determination setting process is started, in the pay-out control unit 633a in the pay-out control board 633, the pay-out control program is under the control of the pay-out control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 103 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S682, the payout control program, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is abnormally operating, and has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating and a value when the retry operation is not abnormally operating (retry The value is set to 0 when the operation is operating normally.

In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. , When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormal, the payout control program determines whether or not the in-bulb flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1. It is determined whether or not (step S686). The in-bulb flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a bulging state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is generated, and the payout motor 584 causes the bulging of the ball. The value is set to 1 when the motion is performed, and the value is set to 0 when the ball glancing motion is not performed.

In step S686, when the flag PEB-FLG is in the state of in-between-balls is not 1 (value is 0), that is, when the ball-bending operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the prize ball information storage in the above-mentioned payout control RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 584.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls. It is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing of step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main processing of the payout control unit) illustrated in FIG. 127. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, full tank information is read from this state information storage area and it is determined whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls stored.

In step S692, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full with the stored game balls, the payout control program performs a payout setting process described later (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 is performed.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full in the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped. When prize balls are generated while the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 584 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls shown in FIG. 135. Will increase.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, the game balls are not paid out.

On the other hand, in step S686, when the flag PBE-FLG is in the ball tilting state, that is, when the ball tilting motion is performed, the payout control program performs a ball tilting motion setting process described later (step S700), and this routine To finish. In the ball-bending operation setting process, a ball-bending operation for eliminating the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body of the dispensing device 580 is performed.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. Yes (step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible (CR unit 6). (When the logic of BRDY from is LOW, that is, when it is held after falling), the logic of the PRDY signal is kept LOW, that is, the state of falling is set, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information. Then, it is stored in the CR communication information storage area.
Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CR from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. .. It should be noted that “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some time (the EXS signal is held rising), it is to maintain its logic HI.

[15-8-1. Payment setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 584 is driven to set the payout of game balls.

When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program sets the drive command number DRV from the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. 139 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is read (step S710). The drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 remains.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 is zero, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (stop). ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

Following step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S716), and reads the actual ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. This count will be described later in detail, but the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. It is performed based on the detection signal of. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual sphere count PB is read from the prize sphere information storage area.

Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the value 0 is set to the actual ball count PB (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is directly set to the drive command number DRV in step S722.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591.

If there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program adds 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and ends this routine. The actual ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, and when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination in step S728, that is, If the actual ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball cannot be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Determine that Therefore, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. Accordingly, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded up into the prize ball stock number PBS, the retry operation for paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. .. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game ball will not be paid out to the player, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the unpaid game ball.

[15-8-2. Sphere movement setting process]
Next, the ball-bending motion setting process will be described. The ball-bending operation setting process is a process of setting to eliminate the ball-blur state caused by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is transmitted.

When the ball gaze operation setting process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program causes the ball gaze judgment time to elapse as shown in FIG. 140 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is performed on the basis of the ball deviation determination time subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the ball gaze determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S750, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the ball-bending determination time has elapsed.

When the ball deflection determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-described payout control internal RAM (step S752). ..

Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program, The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set so as to perform the ball bending operation (step S756), and this routine is ended. With this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S760), and ends this routine. The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body has occurred, and is 1 when the payout motor 584 is performing an overturning operation. When no motion is performed (end of the ball-bending motion), the value is set to 0, respectively.

On the other hand, when the ball entrainment determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

Following step S762, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the lowered state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thereby, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127. The PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CR from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. .. Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that the logic LOW is maintained when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held) as described above, and the EXS signal is maintained. Is HI (the EXS signal is held rising), that logic HI is maintained.

Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[15-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation for paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. 141, detects the rotation of the above-mentioned payout control internal RAM. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the sensor history information storage area (step S770).

Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination of step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program, The value 1 is added to the mismatch counter INCC (increment, step S774). The inconsistency counter INCC is the number of balls of the game balls that are paid out by being received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. , Is a counter for calculating the difference, and normally, the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out in the concave portion of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 match. Therefore, the value becomes 0. Since the payout control program performs the retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 139, the number of balls of the game balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out by the retry operation and the actual payout detection The number of balls detected by the sensor 591 and the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to a mismatch with each other are determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. At times, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S776). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S776, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591.

When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrements, step S778. ).

Following step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsatisfied game ball will be paid out due to the retry operation is about 1/millionth, and in the present embodiment, the inconsistency threshold INCTH. The value 5 is set as

In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the power is restored. The information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, it is possible to continue monitoring the payout operation (retry operation) of the game ball by the payout device 580, which was performed immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure, from the time of power recovery. There is. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is normally performed, that is, the payout device. It is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by 580 is in a normal state, and even when the power is restored, it is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state. Therefore, even when the power is restored, it is possible to determine in step S780 that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state.

When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, in step S780, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays “retry error”. In order to inform that it is, the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set by setting retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED display 860b which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 633. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that the prize ball is being stocked, the payout control program sets the prize ball stocking information for displaying the number "9" on the error LED display 860b and incorporates the payout control described above. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

Following step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the external switch occurs when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 102 as a RAM clear signal as described above. Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control program described above erases all of the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and issues the RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board shown in FIG. Output to 1510. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 998.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and the retry operation is not abnormally operating (the retry operation is When operating normally, the value is set to 0.

The payout control program shows the retry error information (or prize ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. In the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 by the command transmission process of step S566, and LED display data is created in step S564 of the process. In the processing, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored in the output information storage area as LED display information, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area is stored in the output information storage area in step S548 in the same processing. Based on this, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b, and the number "5" is displayed on the error LED display 860b. In the main control board 1310 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 127. The peripheral control board 1510 issues a door frame side lighting blink command for outputting a lighting signal, which causes a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). It outputs to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. As described above, the clerk or the like in the hall who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to display the number "" on the error LED indicator 860b mounted on the payout control board 633. By visually observing that "5" is displayed, it can be confirmed that a "retry error" has occurred. Thereby, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk or the like in the hall checks for abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. The work can be performed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified.

In addition, by intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 591, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted and is difficult to detect. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating the retry operation and illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Then, since a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, a clerk or the like in the hall will rush to check the state of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the player who commits the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continue to obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hole due to the action of intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 591 can be suppressed to an extremely small level.

Furthermore, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC determines that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH. It has come to be initialized by the occurrence of the internal factor of becoming. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized, for example, when an external factor such as the operation of the operation switch 954 to cancel the error occurs. Therefore, even if the operation switch 954 or the like is tampered with and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illicit act. Absent.

[15-10. Mismatch counter reset judgment processing]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset processing, the number of game balls that are paid out by being received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between and.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, in the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the time has passed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

If the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the inconsistency counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the initial value 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above (step S794), and this routine To finish. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and the number of game balls that are paid out by being received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls, and usually the number of balls of the game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. Are the same, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 139 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Therefore, by this retry operation, the ball of the game ball received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body and paid out. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the payout of game balls that are inconsistent due to the disagreement between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeated. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, it is experimentally found that the probability that one unsatisfied game ball will be paid out by the retry operation is about several millionth.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 includes the game board 5 and a frame body such as the main body frame 4 on which the game board 5 is mounted as described above, and the game is performed by exchanging the game board 5 (replacement of a new table). Since the specifications can be changed, the payout control board 633 that controls the payout apparatus 580, the power supply board 630 that generates the drive power supply of the payout apparatus 580 and the control power supply of the payout control board 633 have a common function as a frame. Equipped on the body side. In the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU 952a to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeated. The operation can be determined, and in the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 127, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before shutoff is stored at the time of power shutoff, while In the process of step S530 in the power-on process of the payout control unit shown at 129 (setting at power recovery of the RAM work area), the stored inconsistency counter INCC is restarted at power-on.

Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 5 mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is replaced with a game board 5′ of another game specification different from this game board 5 and the power is turned on, the payout control board The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in 633 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 ′ mounted, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 before replacement is inherited as it is. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 5′, and by chance happens to have a probability of one millionth of a million, the number of unmatched game balls occurs, and the inconsistency counter INCC is generated. When the mismatch counter INCC increases and becomes equal to or more than the mismatch threshold value INCTH described above, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the retry operation is an abnormal operation within a short period of time by replacing the game board 5 with the game board 5'. There is a risk. That is, in a period shortly after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5', an abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, contact of various connectors. There is a possibility that the retry operation may be suddenly determined to be an abnormal operation even though no defect has occurred.

In this way, if the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replacement game board 5′ is new, but the impression is that the game board 5′ is likely to malfunction. It may be given to the player. The probability that one game ball that is inconsistent due to retry operation will be paid out one million times is the probability that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the business hours of the hall, Since the probability that one unsatisfied game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is the same as the probability that one ball is paid out, in the processing of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. 141, there is a probability of several millions from the mismatch counter INCC. The value 1 cannot be subtracted. Then, in one week, the inconsistency counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 1, and in two weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 2 by 3 In the week, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 to make the inconsistency counter INCC have the value 3, and in 4 weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 to make the inconsistency counter INCC the value 4 in 5 weeks. The inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which corresponds to the above-described inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, and therefore the payout control program executes the control of the payout control MPU 952a in step S776 of the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, and contact failure of various connectors. Etc., the segment display mounted on the payout control board 633 in order to notify that there is a “retry error” in the processing of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. 141. Retry error information for displaying the number "5" is set on the error LED display 860b, which is a device, and is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU 952a determines in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeatedly performed. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the processing of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of a few millionths described above is performed. It is disabled. As a result, an error occurs in the retry operation even though there is no abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, and contact failure of various connectors. It is possible to prevent the retry error information indicating that there is a fact from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

In addition, by intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 591, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is paid out by being received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and is described above. In the case where the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short period of time even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed by forcibly generating the retry operation described above, As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can see the state of the pachinko machine 1. I will rush to confirm. Then, the player who commits the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continue to obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. On the other hand, when the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is generated every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although the number is reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating during this period is, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC being up to the mismatch threshold INCTH, and the payout detection sensor 591. It is possible to extremely reduce the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who engages in cheating even if the player is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time.

[15-11. Error release operation determination processing]
Next, the error cancellation operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 124 is operated.

When the error cancellation operation determination process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program causes the operation switch 954 to cancel the error as shown in FIG. 143 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not it is operated (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, the payout control program determines that the input information is read from the input information storage area, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to cancel the error. It is determined that the operation switch 954 has not been operated, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is instructed to perform error cancellation, and the operation switch 954 is operated. It is determined that

When the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 954 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs the error flag state confirmation processing. Perform (step S802). In this error flag state determination processing, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the payout device 580 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed.
As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is normally operating). Since it is set, the payout control program confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a.

Following step S802, the payout control program performs a state information setting process (step S804). In this status information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the status information corresponding to the error flag is set to It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 130, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area, and the read state is read. A status command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormal, has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the error in the retry operation is indicated. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 which has received the retry error information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by the main control program in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the control board 1510, the sub control program performs a retry operation error notification process that notifies that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit." and "Please check the harness of the payout control board." Twice.) Repeatedly flows from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 88 to notify the clerk of the hall. Upon hearing the error notification announcement of this retry operation, the store clerk or the like in the hall receives an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, and contact of various connectors. The defect or the like can be confirmed extremely early as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs a cancellation setting process (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is dealt with. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopping the contents displayed by the error LED display 860b, which is the segment display mounted on the payout control board 633, or that the ball lending is ready. In order to convey the above to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the state of being raised is held, and the game ball or other lending device connection terminal board 869 is connected from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. It outputs to the CR unit 6 via the. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operated is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operated, the error LED indicator 860b has already been displayed. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" for notifying that there is a "retry error", the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above is "normal". The information to which the graphic "-" for notifying the effect is displayed is forcibly overwritten. Also, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be lent, the logic of the PRDY signal is kept at HI, that is, the state is raised, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. It outputs to the CR unit 6 via the equal lending device connection terminal board 869.

Following step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and this routine ends. In this error flag initialization processing, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag is set based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operated is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operated, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal board 869 for playing game balls and the like. ..

As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicates the internal factor when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated while the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process, the external factor is triggered. When the error occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0 and initialized. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is triggered by this, that is, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM to release the error. Similar to the case where the switch 954 is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation control switch 954 (operation switch), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error that has occurred in the payout operation, is subjected to main processing on the main control side from the time the power is turned on. Instead, for a predetermined time until the start, an operation unit for demonstrating a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control internal RAM (payout storage unit) Is functioning as. Further, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 954 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation of the game ball, after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the hall clerk is a person who is not accustomed to operating the pachinko machine, as long as he/she remembers the position of the operation switch 954 on the back surface of the gaming machine, it can be changed according to the timing of operating this operation switch 954. If a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the function to release the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation of the game ball is exerted, while depending on the timing at which the operation switch 954 is operated, the predetermined time has been set since the power was turned on. Within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exerted. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of dealing with the error and appropriately deal with the switch operation without hesitation, so that the game is interrupted. The player can resume the game before the player loses the motivation to play the game.

[15-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication processing, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing during the payout operation by the ball lending will be described, and subsequently, the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, as the amount of money, the number of game balls for 200 yen (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and the amount of 25 balls for 100 yen is paid out twice) is set as the number of lent balls. The case of paying out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms which is the interrupt timer period.

[15-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the ball. When the logical state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible is set, as shown in FIG. 144(d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to convey the PRDY signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a, and as the PRDY, a game ball lending device connection terminal Output to the CR unit 6 through the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed by the player, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (turned on), and this ball lending operation signal is the TDS shown in FIG. 125. It is input to the CR unit 6 from the frequency display plate 365 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls, so as shown in FIG. 144(a), The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). .. This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

In the payout control MPU 952a to which the BRDY signal is input, the payout control program, as shown in FIG. 144(b), changes from the timing H1 to the loan request monitoring time HA (in the present embodiment, from 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms). By the time the set amount of time elapses, a predetermined number of balls to be leased (25 balls in the present embodiment, from the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls, etc., in one payout operation. , Which corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money.) Whether or not BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out, rises.

The CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls for 100 yen out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls. ), BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 for playing balls etc. by the time the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a as a BRQ signal.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), when the BRQ signal rises before the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the payout control MPU 952a starts timing H2 and outputs the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in the present embodiment, It is set to 20 ms±1 ms.), the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the start-up state is held and the payout control MPU 952a is transmitted in order to notify that one payout operation is started. Is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of, and is output as the EXS to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like (timing H3).

The CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input, as shown in FIG. 144(b), before the lending instruction monitoring time HC (set to 20 ms to 58 ms in the present embodiment) elapses from the timing H3. , BRQ which is started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 144(c), the payout control MPU 952a performs one payout operation from timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set). The predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen, is paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a with its logic set to LOW, that is, in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

The CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen of the game balls as the number of lent balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 out of the number of the game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money. ), from timing H5 until the next request confirmation timing HE (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms), BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It outputs to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via 869, and raises and holds the signal (timing H6).

Similarly, when the payout control MPU 952a pays out the number of game balls for the remaining 100 yen to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 using the above-described method, as shown in FIG. 144(c). , The rising and holding EXS signal is set to the logic LOW, that is, held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and as EXS, a game ball lending device connection terminal Output to the CR unit 6 through the plate 869 (timing H7).

The CR unit 6 rises from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (set to 268 ms at maximum in this embodiment) elapses from the timing H7, as shown in FIG. 144(a). The BRDY that is raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The loan request monitoring time HA, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, the lending instruction monitoring time HC, the payout monitoring time HD, the next request confirmation timing HE, and the CR unit loan completion monitoring time HF described above are the payout control shown in FIG. 127. The time is counted by the timer updating process of step S552 in the process of turning on the power to the unit (main process of the payout control unit).

Note that the payout control MPU 952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is in communication) when a ball is out, a ball is caught, a payout detection sensor error, a retry error, a full tank, or the like occurs. 144D, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the logic is LOW, the PRDY signal that is raised and held from timing H1 is set to LOW, that is, when the logic is LOW. The output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, while communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it is held rising), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the payout is performed. It is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( The EXS signal is held at the rising edge) to maintain its logic HI.

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, and the payout control MPU 952a sets the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to 100 as the amount of money. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a circle twice, the game balls whose number of lent balls is 50 are paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322. In addition, a clerk in the hall operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and, for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is the upper plate 321 as the number of lent balls. When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen once as the amount of money, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as the amount of money as the number of lent balls. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 5 times, and the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of lent balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[15-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 allows the CR unit 6 to output the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal board 869 for playing balls, etc., even after the above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Then, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY even if the signal is not output to the payout control board 633 and the signal is not activated, or the lending instruction monitoring time HC described above elapses, and the CR unit 6 connects the game ball or other lending device. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even if the signal is not output to the payout control board 633 via the terminal board 869 and the signal is not lowered or the above-described next request confirmation timing HE has elapsed. Through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the CR unit 6 outputs the signal to the payout control board 633 and the signal is not raised, or even when the above-mentioned CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF elapses, the CR unit 6 is BRDY. Is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and when the signal is not lowered, the PRQ and the EXS described above are used to set the BRQ and Confirm whether BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 144(e) and 144(f), the payout control MPU 952a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and then a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment, from this timing J0). , 200 ms±1 ms)), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the falling state is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. Then, as PRDY, it is output to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the lowered state is maintained and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. Output from the output terminal of, and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal board 869 for playing game balls and the like (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J1 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JB (set to 200 ms±1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J1. That is, it is held in the activated state and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like (timing J2 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from timing J2 to LOW after a lapse of a predetermined period JC (100 ms±1 ms in the present embodiment) from timing J2. That is, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while being held in the lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3. ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal, which is held and lowered from the timing J3, to HI after a predetermined period JD (100 ms±1 ms is set in the present embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, the state is kept up and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 through the game ball or other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4. ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from timing J4 to LOW after a predetermined period JE (100 ms±1 ms is set in the present embodiment) from timing J4. That is, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while being held in a lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5. ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J5 to HI after the lapse of a predetermined period JF (10000 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J5. In other words, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while being kept in the activated state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6. ).

The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are clocked by the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127.

[16. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 153. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 147 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing, and FIG. 150 is a flowchart of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 151 is a flow chart showing an example, FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing an example of connection abnormality determination processing, FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing an example of connection recovery processing, and FIG. 153 is an INIT terminal of a door frame side effect transmitter IC. 6 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal.

As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 is composed of a peripheral control unit 1511 and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1511 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process, and the LOCKN signal. The history creation process, the connection abnormality determination process, and the connection recovery process will be described. The LOCKN signal history creation process is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and the connection abnormality determination process and the connection recovery process are performed when the peripheral control unit power-on described later. The process is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the process, and the connection recovery process is executed subsequent to the connection abnormality determination process. In this embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 145. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 105 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting processing, the production control program performs processing for initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, hot start/cold start determination processing, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing described later, for example, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 102. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106, effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up to is compared with the production backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), and the comparison contents When the two match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, When the hot backup is performed by copying back the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) with respect to Bank0 (1 ms), when the compared contents do not match (that is, , (When they do not match), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are storage areas that are normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, for cold start.

Further, in the hot start/cold start determination processing, also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 106, effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) is compared, and the production backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), is compared. When the compared contents match each other, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage region normally used in peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it covered.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in, the calendar information storage section is set as the current calendar information, and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 and displays the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the device 1600 and turning it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and is currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the effect display device 1600, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is included. When the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of 80%, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the effect display device 1600 is not performed at all. Has become. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets a value of 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. Is set to 0 when not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, triggered by the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 0 to initialize the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG once. Moreover, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it covered.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, first, the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing is being executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and this 1 ms interrupt timer is activated The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN to count the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is shown in FIG. Gaming board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 specifies the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is stored. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the head address is passed through the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger whenever a transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is used. It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and the game. In synchronization with the board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I/O port. When continuous transmission of serial I/O ports for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

Each time the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac generates a transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED, this is taken as a trigger (in the present embodiment, the serial I/O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered by the fact that the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. Then, the data is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai and is written, so that the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written to this. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106 in which various information obtained is set, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is game effect. Whether or not to reflect in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 107 by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Output to the effect display device 1600. As a result, various screens are drawn on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, outputting of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the effect display device 1600 is canceled. It has become. This makes it possible to prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 due to the lamp data output processing in step S1012. A plurality of LEDs, and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and a speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and an upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization between the production of music and sound effects that are combined.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data of sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method that is a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, not only the music and the effect sound according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but also the notification sound and the notification sound are stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order that configures the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series, which constitutes the light emission mode generating schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the light emission data from the first light emission data to the number of light emission data of various LEDs is emitted. The pointer is updated in order to instruct whether the mode is set.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In addition, in the scheduler update processing, from the top drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor/solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the drive data is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to be instructed to the drive data that was originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, the effect control program is information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving unit), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing unit). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. Generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, the production control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the number of holding normal symbols Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization production start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization production, symbol storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and special winning opening 2005 The special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, which indicates the contents of full tank shown in FIG. 102, It is analyzed whether or not it is a full tank error generation command) (command analysis means), and the current game state is recognized. In addition, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main frame opening command, the main frame closing command, the door opening command, or the door frame closing after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands shown in FIG. 122 are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect-related, various commands classified into jackpot-related, and power-on. Various commands to be displayed, various commands to be related to public figure synchronization effect, various commands to be related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands to be displayed for notification shown in FIG. 102, and the door frame opening command described above. , Door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error cancel command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various classified commands, various commands related to tests, and other classified commands.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the reception command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the other abnormality notifications are automatically changed. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the abnormality has been resolved. You can

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is divided into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the effect display device. 1600 (rendering device), (rendering device), a lamp (rendering device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to auditorily warn the outside (error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player operates the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 despite the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game can be suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores in the calendar information storage unit which is acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in this effect control program. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. In addition, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame-decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts the character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displays it on the effect display device 1600. Rendering data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the effect control program in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. Audio data is transmitted as audio data by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the sound volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. The output to the IC 1512c allows music and sound effects to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume can be programmed by the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven levels of the substrate volume, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music or sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes small. However, when an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is conducting an illegal act, a notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while Announces that it is highly possible to increase the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects and to produce a more powerful screen on the production display device 1600, or to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Which is included in the Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is stored in the performance information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the performance backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are all copied in order by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the top address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the second area 1511cc. 1fr) are all copied in order from the start address.

In the backup processing, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 127, that is, for each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511db to Bank2 (SRAM), and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the top address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511dc. (SRAM) are all copied in order from the start address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Subsequent to Step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing (Step S1038), returns to Step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is set to the value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. .., and then step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, and the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0. Set to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the input of the V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 105, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed at the timing will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. At step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is sometimes set to a value of 1. However, this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady process that is currently being executed is assumed to be the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is forcibly canceled on the way and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, at step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) shown in FIG. Notifying the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 in the processing flag SP-FLG, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed by setting the value 0 in the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1038 of the closing process (peripheral control unit steady process). By notifying the signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, and so-called processing is dropped.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in the next step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145. Then, a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. 145. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process has been omitted, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is omitted, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145 will be described. .. When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 105 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 145. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is about 33. It is 0.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

In step S1100, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is finished as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has the peripheral control unit V as the priority order of the interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 145. This means that the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are arranged in time series. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, according to the drive data designated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 105. Is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port. When serial transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port is started, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is first set. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 is performed. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the amplifier board side motor. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 1511caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for writing. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1-byte data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is generated (in the present embodiment, the serial I/O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered by the fact that the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. The frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port is written to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port by transmitting and writing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the peripheral I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid or the solenoid is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created. The data is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown at 127. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I/O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port is registered). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, so that history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation (Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. 127 is generated. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the peripheral MRAM 1511c externally attached to the control MPU 1511a. As described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. , A signal to output a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the frequency of the abnormality and the occurrence state of the abnormality between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired to acquire the drawing status. be able to.

After step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached externally are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, every time the 1ms interrupt timer in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127 is generated. Each time the backup is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms) are included. , And the effect information (1 ms) stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai as effect backup information (1 ms) in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and change the contents stored in the beginning address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the content stored in Bank0 (1ms) is designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank2 (1ms), and the content stored in the top address of Bank0 (1ms) is changed to Bank0 (1ms). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the top address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1 ms). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) continuously from the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511cc. (1 ms), and all are copied in order from the start address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145, within the period of about 33.3 ms, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed. doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt process is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted. Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105, when various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, is triggered by this and is used as a main control to incorporate main circumference serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I/O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the 1st byte, the mode is allocated as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is within the period that can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-cycle serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is followed by the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the period during which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value at the byte is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to the initial value 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation regards the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and sums them (sum value ) Is calculated.

Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data of the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from a pachinko island facility, and when the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a rasp environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 side regards the status allocated as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has been changed to normal circumference data different from the normal one due to noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the 1st byte of the above and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main serial data are shown in FIG. 127. The peripheral control MPU 1511a and the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cac. The "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. It stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU1511a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is stored in association with each other, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal executed when the power outage notification signal (peripheral power outage notification signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 111 is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320), and the power outage notice signal (peripheral power outage notice). It is determined whether or not the (signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is not input, this routine is finished as it is, while the power outage notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure advance notice signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice interrupt processing, which is this routine, has been started.

In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing of this routine is started and the power failure advance notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the electric power of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least for a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) externally attached to the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. However, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in succession, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to request the cause. The contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0(1fr) are designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank2(1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and are stored in Bank0(1fr). From the content stored at the start address of the included received command storage area 1511cac to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Then, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specifies the copy to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) and specifies the copy to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to this point are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core is copied. 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. By specifying copy, the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are predetermined. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied sequentially from the head address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notice signal is input. That is, whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input is continuously determined. By continuously determining in this way, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 is restarted.

In this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure notification signal is canceled in the infinite loop without being continued in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are not connected. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise, and the noise occurs for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the endless loop as determined by S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation processing, a history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal that has a capacity and is output from the LOCKN terminal of the receiver frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Remembered

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , A request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not abnormal data. Predetermined data for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted into the least significant bit B0 by the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←the least significant bit B0. From the most significant bit B7 is shifted bit by bit.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection error judgment processing]
Next, the connection abnormality determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 will be described. In this connection abnormality determination process, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection abnormality determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105, of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive substrate 4450 is stored. As described above, this LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. Is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. Is a signal output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 105, and is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.”)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination of step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no abnormality in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Count the cumulative number). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and the power is restored. It is adapted to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be abnormal is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be the current state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative count that is determined to be in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. When the upper limit value CC-LMT is not reached, the value 0 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT when the cumulative number of times it has been determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. This is a flag that indicates whether or not there is a certain abnormality in the connection. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a certain abnormality, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an abnormality. When the cumulative number of times determined to be the current state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, each value is set to 0. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset by a momentary power failure or a power failure and the power is restored. The communication error flag CC-FLG is restored to the value at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 will be described. In this connection recovery processing, which is executed subsequent to the connection abnormality determination processing shown in FIG. 151, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105, in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a from the first screen data among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data. First, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, while the pointer is being updated, since the effect is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule is being determined. When the effect is completed according to the data and the updating of all the pointers is completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. In this determination, whether or not it is a period in which the effect display device 1600 is displaying the startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or a period in which the effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state for demonstration. It is possible to determine whether or not it is based on the screen generation schedule data, and during the period in which the effect display device 1600 displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or in the customer waiting state. In the period during which the demonstration display device 1600 is performing the demonstration, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the display screen of the pachinko machine 1 when the power is turned on is displayed on the demonstration display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. When it is not during the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 (only in the waiting state for customers), this routine is finished as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while in step S1540 the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the effect has been completed and the pointers have all been updated, that is, when the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It does (counts the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times that it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in the abnormal state, the number of times is not 1 While the routine is ended, even if the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal, even once. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an abnormal state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT This is a flag that indicates whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely abnormal. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely abnormal, the value is 1, and between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection is abnormal has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that there is a fault in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby producing the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is restored.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely abnormal, the communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is finished. In this communication error display processing, in order to notify that there is a certain abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, drawing is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Perform processing. For example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a message "abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display processing, during a period in which the effect display device 1600 displays the startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or during a period in which the effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state for demonstration. An abnormality occurs in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not there is an operation confirmation request, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is a LOCKN terminal as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. Output a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and that Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, while the notification image (for example, “Abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.”) and the notification sound (for example, “ There is an abnormality in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.”) is repeatedly processed from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, a process of turning on all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 107 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8. Peripheral controller steady processing of peripheral controller power-on processing shown in FIG. 145. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the main control side main process of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 126 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. By the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 127 or the like, the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 or the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game balls into the "big hit" is a "big hit", the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It becomes 15 rounds, and in each round, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), that round It is designed to be digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005.

From the main control board 1310, the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 is obtained. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the command, so that the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is a left decorative pattern, the center is a central decorative pattern, and the right side. The variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed by the player. Can be recognized, at this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is possible to confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result also in the two special symbols. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image is visible, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative pattern goes from the central upper side to the central lower side of the display area, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped manner while being variably displayed in an imaginary manner, the left displayed decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state. The left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are in an opaque manner so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, with the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable display and is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120, The left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design, which are variably displayed and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has the first special lottery result selected by accepting the game balls into the first starting opening 2002, or the second special drawing by accepting the game balls into the second starting opening 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result is received, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, as shown in FIG. 153, the effect display device shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started in the display area 1600 (timing K0), the steps in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145. In the scheduler update process of S1020, the screen data starting from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the pointer is updated in order to instruct whether to output the second screen data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, that is, in the scheduler update processing, when the pointer is updated, the production progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. Therefore, while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped. In the meantime, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 152 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. The routine is forcibly ended as it is in the determination of step S1540 in the recovery processing.

As a result, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is a value until the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right side decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Even when it is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the receiver). Connection), even if the number of times it is determined that there is an abnormality has occurred between the transmitter and the receiver without performing the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection restoration process. The connection recovery process is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, "abnormality in upper plate side liquid crystal display device is detected. The message "Please call the clerk." is not displayed, so the door frame side performance receiver that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data The LOCKN signal from ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the image is displayed based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

When the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right side decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 145 is performed. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the effect is completed and all pointers are updated according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since it is completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated in the scheduler update process and the screen generation schedule data is not activated, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. When the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 152, which is executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT Is 0, that is, when the number of times that it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is less than once, the routine is ended as it is, while the communication check counter CC-CNT is terminated. When the value of is not 0, that is, when the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and communication is performed. When the value of the abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. At this time, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends, while the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, the transmitter. When an abnormality has certainly occurred in the connection with the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 If the connection between the transmitters, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been abnormal at least once, it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. When the accumulated number of times does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail so that the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are connected, that is, the transmitter. When the process of recovering the connection with the receiver is performed, and the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. (In other words, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely abnormal), the communication error display process is performed without fail, so that, for example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the "upper plate side liquid crystal display device" is displayed. An error has occurred. Please call the clerk." is displayed and notified, and it is confirmed that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect to be transmitted is validated.

In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started again. In the interval period until the start, since the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that tells that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled. In other words, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been abnormal at least once, the accumulated judgment that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal When the number of times does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, by always performing the SYNC pattern output processing, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the transmitter and the receiver. While performing the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely abnormal), the communication error display process is performed without fail, so that, for example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, "abnormality in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device" is displayed. Has occurred. Please call the clerk." is displayed and notified.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative pattern and the central decorative pattern are activated. , And until the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 times. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. Without performing the communication error display processing in step S1548, for example, the message "There is an error in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." is no longer displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is Displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this manner, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are changed again. In the interval period until the display is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated. , Drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that is abnormal data is invalidated. This is because the combination result of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the information that is of most interest to the player, and the profit is given to the player. Since the player can judge whether or not the big hit game state occurs, the left side decoration is displayed when the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Until the design, the center decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed, even if the effect image drawn in the display area is disturbed due to noise or the like and cannot be drawn correctly, By suspending and displaying the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600, rather than performing a process of recovering to a state in which drawing can be correctly performed, the player's most interest Some information has been drawn.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the performance display device 1600, or in the customer waiting state. This is significantly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e included in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration by the display device 1600. This LOCKN signal output request data is obtained during the period in which the effect display device 1600 displays the startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or in the period when the effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state for demonstration. It is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, a transmitter. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection with the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e included in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential signal is generated. The two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the digitizing circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally, As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined to be abnormal data, and the LOCKN signal is output to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It is output to the control MPU 1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not abnormal when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and directs the production display drive board 4450 to do so. While it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the production display drive board 4450 has an abnormality. And output a notification image (for example, “Abnormality has occurred on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.”) to the effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. At the same time, an alarm sound (for example, "abnormality is occurring in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") that conveys that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided in the. As a result, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly emitted from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is serial data, the compulsory switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit connection is made so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined. It is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred even if an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that an abnormality has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 131 as the notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds an abnormality, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing an informing process, so that the clerk of the hall or the like can play the game. It is possible to very easily check whether or not an abnormality has occurred before the player plays the game, and the check does not take time and effort. Therefore, it is possible to detect the abnormality without trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. If it is determined that there is a signal to output that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is for the door frame side effect When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the receiver ICSDIC0 receives a communication error between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that the drawn data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to start the connection confirmation signal for notifying the door. By outputting to the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate the communication abnormality during the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect an abnormality due to a communication abnormality during image communication at an early stage and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by detecting and eliminating the abnormality.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives and outputs the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is used when the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received. Around the peripheral control unit 1511 which is a production control microprocessor, a LOCKN signal, which is a communication abnormality occurrence signal that indicates that a communication abnormality has occurred during image communication between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d Since it can output to the control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to notify that a communication abnormality has occurred. The message "Abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." It has become. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an abnormality due to a communication abnormality during image communication at an early stage, notifies the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 of the abnormality, and notifies the player of the hall staff or the like. It is possible to notify the salesperson of the pachinko machine or to notify the salesclerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the salesclerk of the hall can eliminate the abnormality at an early stage when the abnormality occurs. You can start the work to do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by early detecting and eliminating the abnormality.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450 in a period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver are abnormal even at least once when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate the communication abnormality between the image communication. To the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a connection confirmation signal for notifying that transmission is started from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to eliminate the communication abnormality.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side included in the effect display drive board 4450. Even when the connection between the production receiver ICSDIC0 and the transmitter, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal even once, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication abnormality between image communication is set. The door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d transmits a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to notify that the transmission is started from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the variation by starting the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 1404 or the second special symbol display device 1406. The output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped when the progress of step 1 is started again, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d stops when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input. It is possible to stop transmitting the data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It is like this. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is the abnormality correction signal, only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game progress is not executed, it is possible to move toward the direction where the communication abnormality is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the first special symbol or the second special symbol display on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, and starts and stops displaying the variation. Only while the game is not proceeding, while the connection confirmation signal is being repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display device 1404 or the second special symbol display device 1406. Even when the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to change and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect (image disturbance) that progresses on the display screen of is the main control of the main control board 1310. Every time the MPU 1310a starts execution of the game again and ends it (every time period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2), it is possible to move toward the cancellation direction.

According to the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 102 and the payout control board 633 of FIG. The main control board 1310 has a first start opening 2002 and a second start that are start areas in which a game ball shot by the ball-striking launcher 650 is provided in the game area 5a toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 102, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on having entered the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 633 is a payout control microprocessor for controlling the payout of game balls by the payout device 580 based on the payout command from the main control board 1310 shown in FIGS. 121(a) and 121(b). The payout control MPU 952a of 124 is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about a game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 125 is performed after the power is turned on, the information about the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. 110 to output the RAM clear signal of the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor, and the operation within the period when the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 is performed after the power is turned on. Then, the RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the information related to the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and turning on the power. From the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 125 is performed (or the period when the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 is performed from the power-on) When it is operated after the lapse of time, the payout control microprocessor does not output the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor as an error canceling signal for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 580. It also has an error canceling function of outputting to a certain payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 125 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is stored. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 110 for erasing the information regarding is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and the determination processing of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on processing of FIG. When operated within a predetermined period, the RAM clear which outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing the information related to the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. 125 and the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 125 is performed (or the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 from the power-on time). Is operated after a lapse of time), the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, as an error cancellation signal for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the dispensing device 580. Since it also has an error canceling function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error canceling function, can be respectively operated by a single operation switch 954. 1 can be provided. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error canceling function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 3031]
The sensor signal input part of the panel relay board 3031 is various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening. The sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003 (in the following, a magnetic detection sensor 4024) are connected. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor here, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

In a game machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball that has been driven into the game area, and the flow state of the game ball is manipulated as desired to obtain an unreasonable profit. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means, a sound alarm, or the like. There is.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 155 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 3031. As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive effect element or the like, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when the magnetism of a predetermined value or more is not detected, and outputs a voltage when the magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected. It does not (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay substrate 3031 via the connector CON1, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

The transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the pull-up resistor IR0 as well as one end of the resistor IR1, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is off, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b includes a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 at the previous stage of the panel relay board 3031 via the connector CON2. +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR1 at the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the pull-up resistor NR1 as well as one end of the resistor NR2, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and applied with +12V. Further, the detection circuit portion 4164 is a circuit that is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 and is configured by a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12V is applied and a transistor ITR1 whose base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

Further, in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. In this way, the panel relay board 3031 is provided with the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the +12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also increased to +12V (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table form in FIG. 159. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 3031, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. ..

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance occurs when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. There are pin contact type and bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact terminal of the connector member.In the case of the bellows contact type, pulling the harness attached to the connector member at the time of connection work etc. The gap is easier to open than the type. If the gap is opened, dust or the like will easily enter from this portion.

Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when playing right-handed, when a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flow down, vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, causing slight sliding wear. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member (connector CON1) electrically connecting the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output part 4163 of the panel relay board 3031 The operation of will be described. For example, in FIG. 155, when the contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is shown by a chain line. In addition, the magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, the built-in transistor STR is turned on when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Will be lifted. In FIG. 155, the connection point between the pull-up resistors IR0 and IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, since a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. .. When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches the specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 may be turned on even though the magnetic sensor 4024 is not detected. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 3031, when the contact resistance RR is generated, the sensor signal may be erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 156 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the first embodiment of the present embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

It should be noted that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 should be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the special winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, etc. become.

The magnetic sensor input circuit of the present embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 (second detection state). State), even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side, The point is that an avoiding unit 4166 for avoiding the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the avoiding unit 4166.

In the first embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example including a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connection portion. It is connected.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. In addition, +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of which +12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected. It is connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal input unit 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the +12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is determined to be HI, the main control unit MPU1310a is in the vicinity. Processing such as transmitting an error command to the control unit 1511 and outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the production display device 1600, an alarm lamp, voice, and the like of the abnormality.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state (second state) in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so The transistor STR turns on.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Comes up. In FIG. 104, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, since a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and the zener It will be applied to the cathode terminal of the diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (there is no voltage change). Therefore, when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a sends an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the error command sent by the magnet. It informs that an illegal game action using is performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is broken by a game board side effect display device 1600, a door frame side effect display device, a warning display device, a voice, or the like. .. Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 157 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuits 1310b have the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and a second resistor IR1 having one end connected to the other end and the other end grounded. And the resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 155, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged at the subsequent stage to the other end of the resistor IR1. The difference is that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example including a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground and drops when the predetermined voltage is applied.

Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connecting portion. ing.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which the other end of +12V is applied and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the detection circuit section 4164. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal input unit 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the +12V side.

Further, a voltage of +12V is applied to the series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3 of the avoidance unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor of the avoidance unit 4166 are applied. A current flows to ground via IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, the potential difference generated across the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Comes up. In FIG. 157, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, since a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and It will be applied to one end of the 1 resistance. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current also flows through the second resistor IR3 to ground. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage is almost grounded. After falling, almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of the second resistor IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage maintains the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (there is no voltage change). Therefore, when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 158 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 155, the connector, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuits 1310b have the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 that form a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage that is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage and that is lower than the first voltage. It is configured to include IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared with the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 connected in series instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded are respectively connected in parallel to two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 forming a Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example including the resistors IR4 and IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the latter stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding-stage transistor ITR0 and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding-stage transistor ITR0. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 as well as to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which the other end of +12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off and the transistor ITR2 also turns off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the +12V side.

In addition, a voltage of +12V is applied to the series resistance circuit including the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR5 of the avoiding unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1 of the avoiding unit 4166, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR4. Current flows to ground via IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

When the preceding-stage transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, the potential difference generated across the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is turned on.

When the latter transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the latter transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Comes up. In FIG. 158, the connection point between the pull-up resistors IR0 and IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a current flows in the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a voltage obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage. Will be applied to one end of the resistor IR1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and this current also flows to the ground through the resistors IR4 and IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage drops to the ground, and almost no current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. Does not flow. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Also, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit are kept off. That is, the avoiding unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (there is no voltage change). Therefore, when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input sections 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 turns off.

Even when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, similarly, the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on by turning on the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. When there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and the provided voltage output units 4163 are provided in a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (commercial item, TOSHIBA Co. Manufactured by the company).

Although the sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 3031 of the present embodiment has been described above, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, but a connector member. It is sufficient to transmit the sensor signal from the detection sensor by various sensors, for example, various types of sensors, for example, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the vibration detection sensor, the contact. It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to Examples 1 to 3, unless the gist of the present invention, that is, the circuit configuration including the avoidance unit 4166 is changed, the voltage output unit 4163, The locations of the avoidance section 4166 and the detection circuit section 4164 on the substrate can be selectively changed in various ways as required. Below, several variations of the arrangement example are shown.

[Example 4]
FIG. 161 shows an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 are arranged on the panel relay substrate 3031. Note that the basic electrical connection is the same as that of the circuit shown in FIG. 156. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 156.

As shown in FIG. 161, the collector terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the panel relay substrate 3031, the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of the detection circuit section 4164 of the main control substrate 1310, and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 are connected to the connector CON2. Are electrically connected by.

[Example 5]
FIG. 162 shows another example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163 and the avoidance unit 4166 are arranged on the panel relay board 3031, the signal relay transistor ITR0 is moved to the main control board 1310, and the transistor ITR0 is arranged in the preceding stage of the detection circuit section 4164. There is. Also in the fifth embodiment, the basic electric connection is the same as that of the circuit shown in FIG. 156. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 156.

As shown in FIG. 162, the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 forming the avoidance section 4166 of the panel relay board 3031 and the base terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected by the connector CON2. It is connected.

In the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 161 and the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 162, the harness in which the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 have connector members at both ends (in FIG. 157, simply described as CON2). ) Is electrically connected by. Therefore, contact resistance may occur at the connector connecting portion as well. Therefore, in order to avoid the erroneous detection of the signal due to the contact resistance, as a modified example of the fourth embodiment, other than the pull-up resistor NR1 in which +12V is applied to one end of the connector member CON2 on the circuit, that is, other than the pull-up resistor NR1. As with the avoiding unit 4166, another avoiding unit may be provided between the connection point between the end and the signal line connected to the connector member CON2 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. According to this, the false detection of the signal can be further reduced, and the reliability of the signal detection is enhanced.

In addition, in the present invention, description is given using an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 is configured by the pull-up resistor IR2 and the transistor ITR1 to which +12V is applied at one end in the fourth and fifth embodiments. This essentially selects the one that is advantageous in control due to the difference in logic (whether it is HI level active or LOW level active) input to the main control MPU 1310a connected to the subsequent stage. Therefore, a circuit including a pull-up resistor IR2 and a transistor ITR1 is provided as a detection circuit unit 4164 for this purpose, and the detection circuit unit 4164 is provided in the preceding stage of the main control input circuit 1310a.

However, the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1 to which +12V is applied is connected to the signal line, the base terminal is connected via the resistor NR2 to the subsequent stage of the signal line, and the emitter terminal is grounded, and A main control input circuit 1310a whose collector terminal is connected to an input port (not shown) itself substitutes the detection circuit unit 4164 (in other words, a circuit that functions as the detection circuit unit 4164, that is, a main circuit). Since it is possible to perform detection by the control input circuit 1310a), however, the present invention is sufficiently established.

[Example 6]
FIG. 163 shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. The signal relay transistor ITR0 is also provided in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164 by moving the arrangement location to the main control board 1310. Also in this sixth embodiment, the basic electrical connection is the same as that of the circuit shown in FIG. 156. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 156.

As shown in FIG. 163, the signal line communicating with the connector CON1 to which the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031 is connected, and the avoidance unit 4166 of the main control board 1310 are configured. The cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is electrically connected by the connector CON2.

When the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are circuit-configured as in the above-described fourth to sixth embodiments, the panel relay board 3031 is used as a detection sensor unit (in this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is used. However, there is an advantage that it can be shared regardless of the type.

From the standpoint of assembling, it is desirable to use the relay board, but the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 provided at the starting opening that brings the player to the lottery are convenient. Even if it is omitted, it may be better to connect directly to the main control board 1310 by a connector without providing a circuit element on the relay board from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. In such a case, the configuration of the seventh embodiment works well.

[Example 7]
FIG. 164 shows an example in which the voltage output unit 4163 of the magnetic sensor input circuit, the avoidance unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example as well, the transistor ITR0 for signal relay is also provided in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164 by moving the arrangement location to the main control board 1310. Also in the seventh embodiment, the basic electric connection is the same as that of the circuit shown in FIG. 156. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 156.

As shown in FIG. 164, the panel relay board 3031 is only formed with signal lines (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relay the signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024. The signal line is electrically connected to the connector CON1 of the main control board 1310 by a harness connected to a connector on the panel relay board 3031. That is, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 of the main control board 1310 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is built in via the connector CON1 and the panel relay board 3031 in the preceding stage of the connection section. Is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR.

In FIG. 164, the relay board provided with only the connectors (CON3, CON4) is used, but the output of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is directly connected to the main control board 1310 without using the relay board. Can also

The configuration shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7] also includes the avoidance unit 4166, so that the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (there is no voltage change). When a contact resistance is generated due to the slight sliding wear and the like, erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance can be prevented.

In the seventh embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 through the connector CON3 (indicated by a square in the figure) provided on the panel relay board 3031, and the panel relay board 3031 is further connected. It is configured to be electrically connected to the connector member CON1 provided on the main control board 1310 through a connector CON4 (represented by a square in the figure) provided on the. Therefore, the contact resistance may occur at three locations of the connector CON3, the connector CON4, and the connector CON1.

In consideration of this, the contact resistance generated by the looseness of the connection parts (CON3 and CON4 represented by squares in the figure) of the panel relay board 3031 and the voltage due to the current flowing through the contact resistance RR of the connector CON1 part. Even if the detection sensor unit (magnetic detection sensor 4024) is added to the second voltage in the second state, the avoidance unit (the added amount of the voltage due to the contact resistance generated at each of the three connector connection portions described above) is added. 4166 is selected and provided so as to avoid the effect of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected, when a contact resistance occurs due to fine sliding wear of each connector member, erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is prevented. You can

Further, in the configurations shown in [Example 4] to [Example 7], the Zener diode ZD0 is used as the avoidance section 4166, but the avoidance section 4166 is not limited to the Zener diode ZD0 and is described earlier. The avoiding unit 4166 of FIG. 157 (Example 2) or the avoiding unit 4166 of FIG. 158 (Example 3) can be used.

Since the panel relay board 3031 shown in the embodiment 7 is formed with only signal lines (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relay the signals from the detection sensor units, signals from a plurality of detection sensor units are transmitted. There is an advantage in that the panel relay boards 3031 are independently aggregated, printed wirings are formed so as to be combined into one connector member, and the main control board 1310 is connected by a connector.

[Electrical connection of detection sensor, panel relay board and main control board]
Next, the electrical connection of the detection sensor section 4000, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 165 is a block diagram mainly showing the basic configuration of the electrical connection of the detection sensor section, the panel relay board, and the main control board. The detection sensor section 4000 is a generic term for various detection sensors arranged at predetermined positions on the game board 5, and as described above, for example, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second The start opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (reference numeral 3003 in FIG. 102) and the like correspond.

The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and is a board on which the main control MPU 1310, which is the main control body, is mounted. The panel relay board 3031 is a board that relays the detection signal of the detection sensor unit 4000 to the main control board 1310.

The detection sensor section 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031. Further, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are a harness in which a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 have connection connectors at both ends. They are electrically connected by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor section 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 included in the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control board, and the detection sensor section 4000 detects the detection. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Arrangement Position of Panel Relay Board 3031 and Main Control Board 1310 in the Gaming Machine]
FIG. 166 is a front view schematically showing each example of the arrangement positions of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in the pachinko machine 1. In FIGS. 166(A) to 166(D), the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are the rear part of the game board 5 at positions that are not visually recognized by the player, and basically, the effect display device (for example, the display device). , Liquid crystal display device) 1600 (see FIG. 100, not shown in the figure). Note that reference numeral 180 is a handle unit provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and the like and operated by the player, and reference numeral 303 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and the like. The pressing operation unit is operated by the player to perform an effect.

In FIG. 166(A), the main control board 1310 is arranged in the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 3031 is at the lower rear part of the game board 5 to the right of the main control board 1310 in a front view. The arrangement pattern is shown. 166(A) to 165(D), specifically, a box attached to the rear surface of a plate-shaped transparent game panel 1100 (see FIGS. 100 and 101) that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. The panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 in the shape of a circle.

FIG. 166(B) shows that the panel relay board 3031 is arranged in the center of the lower rear portion of the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 is on the lower rear portion of the game board 5 to the right of the panel relay board 3031 in a front view. The arrangement pattern is shown. In FIG. 166(C), the main control board 1310 is arranged in the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 3031 is on the lower left part of the game board 5 to the left of the main control board 1310 in a front view. The arrangement pattern is shown.

166(A) to 166(C), the positional relationship of the panel relay board 3031 with respect to the main control board 1310 in the front-rear direction is the same layer as the main control board 1310 or the panel relay board in front of the main control board 1310. 3031 is located.

In addition, FIG. 166 (D) shows an arrangement pattern in which the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are arranged in an overlapping manner in the front-rear direction at the center of the lower rear portion of the game board 5. In FIG. 166(D), a panel relay board 3031 is arranged in front of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIGS. 166(A) to 166(D) described above, the arrangement of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 is determined under various conditions.

The detection sensor section 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031. Further, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are a harness in which a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 have connection connectors at both ends. They are electrically connected by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor section 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 included in the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control board, and the detection sensor section 4000 detects the detection. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, the embodiments described below were made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance. The present invention relates to a game machine in which the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of the positional relationship between the vibration source and the control board.

[Example of avoidance unit]
167(A) to 167(C) are diagrams showing an arrangement example of the avoidance unit 4510 with respect to the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. The avoiding unit 4510 has a circuit configuration including the avoiding unit 4166 for avoiding the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. The avoidance unit 4166 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, and in the circuit portion arranged before the avoidance unit 4166, looseness occurs in the connection state of the connector member, and contact resistance is generated in this portion. By doing so, even if the voltage is added by the contact resistance, the effect of the added voltage on the detection circuit unit arranged in the subsequent stage of the avoidance unit 4166 is avoided.

As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, there is an increased possibility that a signal from the detection sensor unit 4000 will be erroneously detected due to the contact resistance of the connector member. However, as shown in FIGS. 166(A) to 166(D) described above, normally, the arrangement of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 is determined from various conditions. In that case, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, as the vibration generation source to be affected, in addition to the one caused by the collision between the game ball guiding path member arranged in the right side region of the game region 5a by the right-handed hitting and the game ball, for example, an effect button (operation button) The hitting operation, the hitting operation of a hitting mallet of the ball launching device, the sound of a high output speaker, and the like.

Therefore, the embodiments described below were made in view of such circumstances, and the avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance due to loosening of the connector member In addition to providing the unit 4510, the avoidance unit 4510 is appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 3031 or the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source.

FIG. 167A shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the panel relay board 3031. Vibration is applied to the connector member 4501 that electrically connects the detection sensor section 4000 and the panel relay board 3031 to the connector. Even if the member 4501 is loosened and a contact resistance is generated due to the looseness, the avoidance unit unit 4510 avoids the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. Is.

FIG. 167(B) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the main control board 1310, and the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 is vibrated. The addition causes the connector member 4502 or 4503 to loosen, and even if a contact resistance is generated due to the looseness, the avoiding unit unit 4510 avoids the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance, so that the relay member is relayed from the panel relay board 3031. This is to avoid erroneous detection of the output signal.

FIG. 167C shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on each of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310, and a connector for electrically connecting the detection sensor section 4000 and the panel relay board 3031. Vibration is applied to the member 4501, and vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310, whereby the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502, or the connector Even if the member 4503 is loosened and a contact resistance is generated due to the looseness, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit 4000, In addition, erroneous detection of the signal relayed and output from the panel relay board 3031 is avoided.

[Specific Example of Vibration Source and Arrangement Example of Avoidance Unit 4510]
168(A) to 168(F) are diagrams showing a specific example of the vibration source in the pachinko machine 1 and an arrangement example of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. In each figure, the member that is the vibration source is indicated by the hatched portion. FIG. 168(A) to FIG. 168(C) are games in which a large number of right-handed game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down in the right side area of the game area 5a when the player is right-handed and playing a game. An example is shown in which the ball guiding path unit 4200 is provided, and when slight sliding wear occurs due to the vibration from the game ball guiding path unit 4200 being applied to the connector member, this may cause contact resistance. There is.

In the case of the game machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168(A), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball by right-handing, a panel is provided for the game ball guide path unit 4200 which is the vibration source. Since the relay boards 3031 are arranged close to each other, the connector member [connector member 4501 shown in FIG. 167(A)] of the panel relay board 3031 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167(A)].

In the case of the game machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168(B), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball caused by right-handing, the main component is the main source for the game ball guide path unit 4200 which is the vibration source. Since the control boards 1310 are arranged close to each other, the connector member [connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 167(B)] of the main control board 1310 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167(B)].

In the case of the game machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168(C), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball caused by right-handing, the main component is the main game ball guide path unit 4200 which is the vibration source. Considering that both the control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are arranged close to each other, the connector members of either board [the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502, and the connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 167(C)] also vibrate. Susceptible to. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on both the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167(C)].

FIG. 168(D) shows a case where the vibration source is the pressing operation unit 303. For example, when the player concentrates on the game, he or she presses the pressing operation unit 303 to perform a striking operation, or at the time of the specific effect, a message “continuous hit” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the player recognizes the message. Thus, when the player continuously hits the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 becomes the vibration generation source when the vibration generation source is an operation to the pressing operation unit 303 for effect. The case is assumed. In such a case, in FIG. 168(D), since the main control board 1310 is arranged close to the pressing operation unit 303 which is a vibration source, the connector member of the main control board 1310 [FIG. 167]. The connector member 4503 shown in (B) is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167(B)].

168(A) to FIG. 167 is not limited to the case of the board placement game machine shown in FIG. 168(D) but is the case of the board placement game machine shown in FIG. 168(B) to FIG. 168(D). The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in (C) can be adopted.

FIG. 168(E) shows a case where the vibration generation source is the hitting mallet 543 of the ball launching device 540 (see FIG. 10 for the specific arrangement position). For example, in a right-handed game, it is assumed that the hitting force (elasticity) against the game ball fired by the hitting mallet 543 of the ball launching device 540 becomes large, and the shock at this time becomes a vibration generating source. In contrast to such a case, in FIG. 168(E), since the panel relay board 3031 is arranged in close proximity to the hitting mallet 543 which is a vibration generation source, the connector member of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. The connector member 4501] shown in A) is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167(A)].

168(A) is not limited to the case of the board arrangement game machine shown in FIG. 168(E), and may be the case of the board arrangement game machine shown in FIGS. 168(B) to 168(D). The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIG. 167C can be employed.

FIG. 168(F) shows a case where the vibration generation source is the main body frame speaker 622 for sound output (see FIG. 79 for a specific arrangement position). For example, a large volume of sound effect is output from the main body frame speaker 622 in order to raise the game state during the specific effect, but it is assumed that the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 at this time serves as a vibration generation source. In contrast to this case, in FIG. 168(F), since the panel relay board 3031 is arranged in close proximity to the main body frame speaker 622 that is a vibration source, the connector member of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. The connector member 4501 shown in (A) is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167(A)].

This is not limited to the case of the board arrangement game machine shown in FIG. 168(F), and even in the case of the board arrangement game machine shown in FIGS. 168(A), 168(B) and 168(D). The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 167(A) to 167(C) can be adopted.

The number of members that serve as the vibration generation source described above is not limited to one in the pachinko machine 1. For example, a member provided with a game ball guide path unit 4200 and a hitting mallet 543, a member provided with a game ball guide path unit 4200 and a pressing operation unit 303, and the like, which is a vibration source according to a game state. Is also expected to change. That is, a gaming machine including a plurality of members that are sources of vibration is assumed. Even in that case, any of the arrangement patterns of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 167(A) to 167(C) can be adopted.

As described above, the avoidance unit 4510 can be appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 3031 or the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit 4510, even if the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the vibration source member, and the contact resistance is generated thereby, the detection sensor unit based on the contact resistance is generated. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the 4000 or the panel relay board 3031.

As described above, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, if the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion, contact resistance occurs. Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when vibration is applied to the connector member from a specific part of the game area where a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flowing down, such as when playing right-handed, this causes contact resistance. There is a risk.

When a current flows through the contact resistance caused by such a situation, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance rises, and an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit unit. is there. That is, the signal from the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

Therefore, it is necessary to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance. As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, there is a high risk that the signal from the detection sensor will be erroneously detected. However, normally, the arrangement of the panel relay board and the main control board on the game board is determined from various conditions. In that case, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, as the vibration source that affects, in addition to the above-mentioned collision between the game board and the game ball by right-handed hitting, for example, the hitting operation of the production button, the hitting operation of the hitting mallet of the ball launching device, the high A large volume of the output speaker may be used.

Therefore, the embodiments described below were made in view of such circumstances, and the object is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance. The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an avoidance unit is properly arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of a positional relationship with a vibration source.

The embodiments described above can be summarized as the following technical means.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] is
One provided with a detection sensor section arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board. In order to solve the above problems,
In the right side area of the game area where the game balls are driven, a game ball guide path unit is provided in which the game balls that are continuously hit to the right by the right hitting the game balls flow down,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is arranged in proximity to the game ball guide path unit, and one of the main control board and the panel relay board is provided with a contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoidance unit for avoiding the voltage addition action is provided,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of [Means 1], the avoidance unit is suitable for one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the game ball guiding path unit that is a vibration source. Can be placed at. Further, by appropriately disposing the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the vibration source member, and even if the contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit or the contact resistance unit It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

A gaming machine according to [Means 2] relays a detection sensor section arranged at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board. In a gaming machine provided with a panel relay board,
Has an operation button that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation for performance,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is arranged close to the operation button, and a voltage due to a contact resistance generated in the connector member is added to one of the main control board and the panel relay board. An avoidance unit for avoiding the action is provided,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of [Means 2], the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the operation button serving as the vibration source. be able to. Further, by appropriately disposing the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the vibration source member, and even if the contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit or the contact resistance unit It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 3] is
A game provided with a detection sensor section arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board. In the machine
There is a ball launching device for launching a game ball toward the game area in response to an operation on the ball hitting handle, and at least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is arranged in proximity to a ball hammer of the ball launching device, and a contact resistance generated in the connector member is provided on one of the main control board and the panel relay board. An avoidance unit is provided for avoiding the voltage adding action due to
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of [Means 3], the avoidance unit is provided on one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the hitting mallet of the ball launching device serving as the vibration source. It can be placed appropriately. Further, by appropriately disposing the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the vibration source member, and even if the contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit or the contact resistance unit It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 4] is
A game provided with a detection sensor section arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board. In the machine
Has a speaker for sound output,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is arranged in the vicinity of the speaker, and an addition action of a voltage due to a contact resistance generated in the connector member is added to one of the main control board and the panel relay board. The avoidance unit for avoiding is provided,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of [Means 4], the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the high-power speaker when it becomes a vibration source. can do. Further, by appropriately disposing the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the vibration source member, and even if the contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit or the contact resistance unit It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

According to the gaming machine of each of the above-described embodiments, the avoidance unit can be appropriately arranged on any one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the game members that are vibration sources. it can. Further, by appropriately disposing the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the vibration source member, and even if the contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit or the contact resistance unit It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

Not limited to the above-mentioned circumstances, it is general in recent game machines that a plurality of movable effect bodies (movable accessory) electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or solenoid used for effect are provided. .. The volume and operating range of these movable accessories are increasing, and the operating speed is increasing depending on the operating range and things, and the moving method is becoming complicated. Therefore, it is conceivable that the movable accessory itself becomes a vibration source, causing looseness in the connector member, which causes contact resistance. Even in such a case, the embodiment of the present invention can avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit or the panel relay board due to the contact resistance.

By the way, if the plurality of movable accessory parts are not in the initial position, it may not be possible to normally start the predetermined effect.

Therefore, in order to reliably grasp the initial position of the movable effect body, the origin position detection sensor (a photosensor consisting of a combination of a light emitting type and a light receiving type is often used) is directly attached to the movable effect body or the drive motor. In the mold, these detection signals are fed back to the control subject and used for control. The exchange of electrical signals between the control board for production and the drive board is realized by the connector members and the harness connecting them.

Although detailed illustrations have already been made, many illustrations are omitted, but the arrangement position of the movable effect character on the game board surface is, for example, the upper rear of the game area 5a (initial position), the left rear of the game area 5a. (Initial position), the production movable body divided into the left and right in the center of the game area 5a is united in the center of the game panel, or the initial position in the lower center of the game area 5a (behind the special winning opening unit, etc.) Things move upwards, and the arrangement position changes variously in order to appeal the distinctiveness of the game machine depending on the model and version.

Now, if it becomes impossible to correctly transmit and receive the drive data and each signal for operating it and the origin detection signal, it is assumed that not only error detection may not be possible but also erroneous transmission may occur. .. Here, it is considered that the avoidance unit 4166 described above is provided on the drive board in the subsequent stage in the transmission direction of the origin position detection sensor or on the signal input side of the control-side peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102). It

As described above, even when performing the effect of rapidly combining at least two movable members, it is expected that the vibration due to the collision at that time may be transmitted violently, and in this case also, it is necessary to take appropriate measures. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 169(C), when performing the intense heat effect in which the left and right movable members shown by hatching are united in the central portion of the game board 5, the arrangement position of the peripheral control board and the left and right It becomes necessary to consider the location of the sensor that detects the origin position of the production movable body.

[Electrical connection of origin position detection sensor, drive board and peripheral control board that controls it]
FIG. 169(A) shows a basic configuration of mainly electrical connection of the peripheral control board 1510, the panel relay board 3031 (driving board), the driving means, and the origin position detection sensor 4000 for detecting the origin position of the movable effect member. It is a block diagram showing.

The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the production, and is a board on which the peripheral control unit 1511 which is the main production control is mounted. The panel relay board 3031 (driving board) is also a board that relays the detection signal of the origin position detection sensor section 4000 to the peripheral control board 1510.

In FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 is the main control unit for performance, and the panel relay board 3031 (drive board) outputs the drive data output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the drive source and at least the movable effect body. The information of the initial position (origin position detection sensor) is input and the input information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used for control based on this. The panel relay board 3031 (driving board) is for supplying a driving current according to a driving signal to the driving means, and is also an origin for detecting an initial position for supplying a driving current according to the movable effect body. The position detection is transferred to the panel relay board 3031 (driving board). As shown in FIG. 169(A), transmission/reception of these control signals is performed by electrical connection by connector members 4504, 4505, 4506.

The positional relationship of the movable member for producing the vibration source and the positional relationship of the connector member connecting the peripheral control board 1510 or the panel relay board 3031 (driving board) and the origin position detection sensor are various. The avoidance unit 4150 is arranged in consideration of an appropriate influence of looseness of the connector connection due to vibration. 169(A) or 169(B) can be provided as appropriate. As a result, even if the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the vibration source member and the contact resistance is generated due to the looseness, the signal from the origin position detection sensor 4000 or the drive board is erroneously caused by the contact resistance. It is possible to avoid detection.

When operating the movable accessory, the problem was the loose connector connection at the drive means, the origin position detection sensor unit, the drive board, and the peripheral control board, which were connected by the connector. It is also applied when considering a ball launch device and a speaker as vibration sources.

[Grouping of movable parts for multiple performances]
As described above, it is general that a game machine is provided with a plurality of movable effect bodies (movable actors) that are electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or solenoid used for effect. The volume and operating range of these movable accessories tend to increase, and the operating speed tends to increase depending on the operating range and things, and the moving method is complicated. Furthermore, the movable range of each different movable accessory may cross.

For example, when an abnormality occurs in one of the plurality of movable accessory members that does not return to the respective initial positions at which the operation starts when the performance is started, the operating states of the other movable accessory objects are mostly considered. The current situation is not. If the returning operation is performed only by the movable accessory having an abnormality without considering other movable accessory, there is a possibility that the movable accessory may interfere with the other movable accessory. If this happens, the player may feel uneasy and the interest in the game may be diminished.

Here, in order to use the movable accessory for the effect, it is necessary to restore all the movable accessories to the initial positions. Also, if the accessory is unintentionally stopped at a position that is not the initial position for some reason, an operation to restore the movable accessory to the initial position is performed. If you do not take into account that the movable ranges of movable accessories intersect each other like in the above, when performing the recovery operation, all movable accessories are physically interfered with each other to be restored to the initial positions. It may not be possible. In such a case, a large vibration different from usual may occur due to physical interference of the movable accessory, but since the avoiding unit 4166 is provided as described above, the peripheral control is performed. On the substrate 1510, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the detection signal of the sensor.

Therefore, in the embodiment described below, in order to surely restore the plurality of accessory members to the initial positions, the movable accessory objects whose operation ranges physically interfere with each other are collectively managed as one group. , The movable accessory in the group is not physically interfered with each other during the operation of restoring the movable accessory to the initial position where the movable accessory starts the operation for starting the production. By performing the return operation in the predetermined operation sequence as described above, the recovery from the position other than the initial position is surely performed.

In the following embodiments, each of the plurality of movable accessory members is movable within an operation range from an initial position at which an operation for effect is started to an operation position at which an operation for effect is finished. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each of the plurality of movable accessory parts is divided into a plurality of groups in which the operating ranges of the respective movable accessory objects do not interfere with each other, and in at least one group, the operating ranges are mutually different. It contains multiple moving parts that interfere.

In addition, each of the plurality of movable accessory parts is provided with an initial position detection sensor (for example, a photo sensor) that detects at least an initial position that is set in advance. It should be noted that the position detection sensor may be provided with a position detection sensor for detecting an intermediate position of the operation range or an end position of the operation range, in addition to the initial position detection sensor capable of detecting the operation start position for production. Good. Peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined position (initial position or midway position or end position) as described above even for one of a plurality of movable accessory members in a group including a plurality of movable accessory objects whose operating ranges interfere with each other. When there is an abnormality that is not detected, each movable accessory does not physically interfere with each other during the restoration operation to the initial position where each movable accessory becomes the start position of the operation for starting the production. As described above, all movable accessory members in the group are restored to their initial positions in accordance with the predetermined operation sequence.

FIG. 170 is a front view conceptually showing, for example, a plurality of movable effect objects for performance arranged in the back effect unit 3100 and grouping of the plurality of movable accessory objects. As shown in FIG. 170, an accessory group 01 (reference numeral 5000) is arranged in the center of the pachinko machine 1, and an accessory group 02 (reference numeral 5002) is arranged in the right side of the pachinko machine 1. A role group 03 (reference numeral 5004) is disposed on the left side of the machine 1, a role group 04 (reference numeral 5006) is disposed at the upper center of the pachinko machine 1, and a lower center of the pachinko machine 1 is disposed. Has an accessory group 05 (reference numeral 5008). That is, the pachinko machine 1 has five accessory groups.

The five accessory groups 01 to 05 do not physically interfere with each other within the operation range. More specifically, the accessory group 01 includes a mask accessory, a body deformed left accessory, a body deformed right accessory, a body storage-appearing accessory, an upper liquid crystal driving accessory, and a lower liquid crystal driving accessory. There is. The character group 02 is composed only of right shoulder character parts, the character group 03 is composed of only left shoulder character parts, the character group 04 is composed of only face character parts, and the character group 05 is composed of pop-up character parts only. Has been done.

Therefore, the movable accessory that physically interferes with the operation range for production is in the same group. In the above example, the masked accessory, the body deformed left accessory, the body deformed right accessory, the body retracted-appearing accessory, the upper liquid crystal driving accessory, and the lower liquid crystal driving accessory belonging to the accessory group 01 are in different operating ranges. Are supposed to interfere with each other.

[Recovery operation of the movable accessory to the initial position (referred to as accessory correction operation)]
If even one of the movable accessory members in the accessory group is abnormal, all the movable accessory objects in the group are operated in a predetermined operation sequence to restore the initial position. For example, check the photo status of all the motors when the status changes or when the fluctuation starts, and if there is a problem (for example, if it is detected that the motor is not in the initial position), check the status of the role group to which the motor belongs. Using the motor sequence data for performing the correction operation for all the accessory, the accessory is restored to the correct position.

In this embodiment, as for the accessory group 02 to the accessory group 05, since only one movable accessory belongs to each accessory group, the other accessory groups are included in the other accessory groups during the restoration operation to the initial position. Does not physically interfere with each other, the accessory correction operation may be performed in parallel for each accessory group. As for the accessory group 01, since there are six movable accessory members belonging to the accessory group 01, it is predetermined so that the movable accessory objects in the group do not physically interfere with each other during the restoration operation to the initial position. It is necessary to perform in the specified operation sequence.

Hereinafter, an example of the accessory correction operation in the accessory group 01 will be described. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 physically operates during the restoration operation to the initial position when there is an abnormality that the initial position is not detected even in one of the plurality of movable accessory members belonging to the accessory group 01. All movable accessory members in the group are operated according to a predetermined operation sequence so as not to interfere with each other, and are restored to their initial positions.

More specifically, when it is determined that even one of the movable winning objects in the winning group 01 has a photo abnormality, all the winning objects in the group stop operating. Note that the photo abnormality means that the movable accessory has not returned to the predetermined initial position. The accessory correction operation in the group is not limited to the movable accessory in the problem location, and all the movable roles in the group to which the problematic movable accessory belongs by using the predetermined accessory correction motor sequence data. By restoring the objects to their respective initial positions, the problematic movable accessory is restored to the correct initial position.

The accessory correction motor sequence data mainly defines the drive sequence of the motors to be driven, the operation time thereof (in other words, the drive start timing and the drive end timing), and the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. It is stored in. In the case of the accessory group 01 described above, since there are six movable accessories, the motors as drive sources for driving these six movable accessories are motor A (masked accessory) and motor B (body transformation), respectively. Left part), motor C (body deformed right part), motor D (body storage-appearing part), motor E (upper liquid crystal driving part), motor F (lower liquid crystal driving part). To do.

When performing the restoring operation to the initial position regardless of the role group, the motors to be driven may be sequentially driven one by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this. If no physical interference can occur, a plurality of motors to be driven may be driven. For example, the driving start timings may be shifted to drive them together, or a plurality of them may be driven simultaneously.

For example, assume that a photo abnormality is detected for the body storage-appearing accessory (motor D). FIG. 171 is, as an example, a timing chart in the case of performing the restoration operation to the initial position performed at this time. In FIG. 171, the restoration operation to the initial position is started at time t0. The motor A is first driven at time t0, and the driving of the motor A is stopped at time t1.

At the same time, that is, at time t1, the motor B and the motor C are simultaneously driven. After that, at time t2, the motor E and the motor F are simultaneously driven. Further thereafter, at time t3, the motors B and C are simultaneously stopped. After that, at time t4, the motors E and F are simultaneously stopped. Further, the motor D is driven at the same time t4. Then, at time t5, the drive of the motor D is stopped. That is, the restoration operation to the initial position is completed at time t5. It should be noted that driving of each motor is stopped on condition that photo detection is normal.

It should be noted that, when two or more accessory groups perform a restoring operation to the initial position (referred to as an accessory correcting operation), the operating ranges of the movable accessory of different groups physically interfere with each other. If there is not, the accessory correction operation may be performed for two accessory groups in parallel.

Also, when one accessory group is performing a restoration operation (referred to as accessory correction operation) to the initial position, for other accessory groups that do not interfere with each other, the accessory group performing the accessory correction operation. It is also possible to carry out the effect by performing the operation for the effect regardless of the above. By doing so, the effect using the movable accessory as the game machine need not be interrupted, and the effect can be continuously performed.

Further, since it is necessary to perform the accessory correction operation in this accessory group due to an abnormality in one accessory group, it is determined that the accessory correction operation needs to be performed in the case of production. It is also possible to perform the effect using only the movable accessory of the other accessory group without performing the accessory correction operation of. Then, after the production of only the movable accessory of the other accessory group ends, the accessory correction operation of the accessory group for which it is determined that the accessory correction operation needs to be performed is performed. Also by this, the effect using the movable accessory as the game machine does not have to be interrupted, and the effect can be continuously performed.

[Starting timing for restoration operation to the initial position]
The start timing of the operation to restore the accessory to the initial position is when the power is turned on, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation ends, when the big hit opening, big hit ending, when the demo is disclosed, when the demo ends, when the door is opened, when the door is closed, etc. Conceivable.

When turning on the power, be sure to perform the accessory correction operation of all the accessory groups. Therefore, until the accessory correction operation at the time of turning on the power source is completed, the accessory effect operation related to the advance notice and the effect at the time of change is not performed. The start timing of the accessory correction operation related to the advance notice and the effect at the time of change will be valid from the next change when the accessory correction operation at power-on is completed. Also, the accessory correction operation when the power is turned on is always executed for all the accessories regardless of whether or not each of the accessories is at each origin.

When the power is turned on, the accessory correction operation is performed, for example, by (1) performing a minimum operation on the side opposite to the initial position of the accessory to remove the photo. (2) Next, the accessory is operated to the initial position to detect the photo. Execute (1) and (2) for all the accessories. According to this, it is possible to surely execute the effect operation by the movable accessory during the game is started.

Further, regarding the point that the start timing of the accessory correction operation of the accessory group is the big hit ending, in the case where there are six movable accessories like the accessory group 001, the bonus group 001 of the accessory group 001 is played during the big hit game. Although it takes some time for the accessory correction operation to be performed, the jackpot game itself is over, so if the accessory correction operation of the accessory group 001 is not involved in the game, the player can be relieved.

[Retry during accessory correction operation]
When a character cannot be detected even when performing an effect production, an initial operation when the power is turned on, and an operation to move the character to the origin (photo side) by performing an accessory correction operation, for example, when the movable accessories collide with each other. When it does not go well, it counts one, and when it reaches a predetermined number of times consecutively, for example, a total of 5 counts, until the next time the power is turned back on Make the whole thing group immovable. Note that, regarding the five-time counting, since the count is five times in succession, if the photo detection becomes normal (detected) even once, the count number returns to “0”.

If the retry operation of the accessory correction operation is performed and the photo is detected, the state is restored to the normal effect, but even if the retry operation of the accessory correction operation (five times in the above example) is performed, the photo is recovered. When it cannot be detected, the accessory correction operation of the accessory group determined to need to perform the accessory correction operation is not performed, and only the movable accessory of the other accessory group that can normally perform the performance operation is performed. The production may be performed on behalf of.

In addition, when performing the accessory correction operation, if the number of times that the photo cannot be detected even if the operation of moving the movable accessory to the origin (on the photo side) is continuously performed for a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the photo is abnormal, An example has been shown in which the abnormal accessory and the entire accessory group that includes the accessory are immovable.However, the predetermined number of times, which is the criterion for determining that the photo is abnormal, is changed from the preset standard number to the hole number. It may be configured such that the store clerk can change the number of times as desired.
This makes it possible for the hall side to set an appropriate number of retries when an abnormality occurs in the accessory due to the discovery of a defect after shipping or deterioration over time, and it is necessary to deal with this. For example, when photo abnormalities occur frequently, by setting the number of retries to be less than the standard number, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a complicated observing retry operation is observed by the player and the player's interest is diminished. It will be possible.

For the movable accessory in the accessory group, whether or not to perform the retry operation may be set for each type of accessory group. In this case, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, not only the effect by the movable amusement that is not related to the main game (game contents directly related to the winning) performed on the main control board 1310, but also the main game (auxiliary to the winning) There is a thing to perform with a movable accessory related to (game content related to). If a failure that cannot be restored to the original position occurs in any of a plurality of movable accessory groups in the accessory group, retry operation is performed for the movable accessory group of the accessory group that does not hinder the game. You may choose not to. On the other hand, the production by the movable acupuncture objects related to the main game (the game contents that are auxiliary to the winning) (the production is notified in advance that it seems to be a big hit, or the production is notified in advance of the probability change) In the case of an accessory group including a movable accessory, a retry operation is performed if any of the movable accessories of this accessory group fails to recover to the origin position. By doing so, it is possible to expect an effect that the player can be relieved and the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating.

Further, it may be set whether the retry operation is performed or not depending on the type of effect to be executed. For example, when a movable accessory is used for the purpose of enlarging the interest of the game by producing a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as during a big hit game, for the role group to which the movable accessory used belongs, Perform retry operation. On the other hand, in the case of a normal game state or a reach state with low expectation, it is possible not to perform the retry operation for a movable accessory that is not related to this game (game contents directly related to winning or losing). Is.

[Operation abnormality notification of movable accessory when photo abnormality is detected]
When the movable accessory is out of order (including the case where the wiring connected to control the accessory is broken), some kind of notification may be given. When the movable accessory is out of order, the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, "I am out of role". The notification is started when the movable accessory becomes the accessory stop processing (5 times counting) at the time of photo abnormality.

Regarding the notification of the failure of the movable accessory, in addition to the display, a sound notification may be performed. In the notification of the failure, the combination of the sound and the display according to the kind of the failure, etc. May be changed.

Further, when not only a plurality of movable accessory or the board surface but also a movable body provided in the frame fails, the movable accessory or the movable body may be notified individually, or the accessory failure. Alternatively, the notification may be made collectively. At this time, in the case of individual notification, it may be displayed side by side on the effect display device so that the failure location can be identified. You may make it notify that it is out of order.

In addition to the failure of the movable accessory or the movable body, for example, when the RAM is initialized, the RAM clear notification sound is made to sound for a predetermined period, but this is different from the notification related to the effect. In the case where the notifications are duplicated, it is preferable to give priority to the RAM clear notification as a situation in which it is necessary to give priority to sound, especially for voice. At this time, after the RAM clear notification sound is sounded for a predetermined period, the accessory failure is notified.

[Another action when photo abnormality is detected]
As a countermeasure against the failure of the movable accessory, as already explained, even if the accessory correction operation for restoring to the initial position is performed or if the accessory correction operation is performed to move to the origin, When it cannot be detected, the retry operation is performed with the specified number of times as the upper limit, but even after retrying the specified number of times, the accessory cannot return to the origin and the photo cannot be detected. An example in which the production operation of the character is continued for the character of the character group in which the failure has not occurred and is left as it is will be described.

As already described in the block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 102, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5. And a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and control of each is shared. Of these, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and controls each effect device based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. Is done. Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and the high-quality performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Sending the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 , Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for transmitting to a drive solenoid and outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side drive emission data composed of a door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame I/O port for frame decoration drive board From the door frame 3 side, or control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the display control unit serial I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512. , And outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, it is determined whether or not all the accessory parts that form the accessory group 01 to 05 are at the reference position, that is, the accessory objects that form the accessory group 01 to 05 are abnormal. Determine if it has not occurred.
Then, when it is determined that all of the accessory parts of the accessory groups 01 to 05 are at the reference position and no abnormality has occurred in any of them, the normal accessory control is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 162, for example, in the role group 01, a mask role object, a body deformed left role object, a body deformed right role object, a body storage first appearance role object, an upper liquid crystal drive role object, a lower part. It is composed of a liquid crystal driver. For example, depending on where the abnormality occurs in the body deformed left accessory, depending on where the abnormality occurs, the stop position of the body deformed left accessory interferes with the recovery operation of the body deformed right accessory to the origin position, In some cases, it may be an unrecoverable obstacle that cannot return all accessories to the original position no matter how many retries. At this time, in the RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511, a flag indicating that the character cannot be recovered is provided for each role group, and 0 is stored when the pachinko machine 1 is started. When the role group of No. is in the unrecoverable state, 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to the role group in the unrecoverable state.

Here, as described above, the accessory groups are grouped so as not to physically interfere with each other. Therefore, even if one of the accessory groups is in the unrecoverable state, it is possible to continue driving the other accessory groups.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the accessory group in the unrecoverable state is left as it is, and the accessory production is continued using the accessory belonging to the other accessory groups.

Specifically, the flag indicating the unrecoverable state is read from the RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511. When the flags corresponding to any of the accessory groups are 0, it is determined that no irrecoverable failure has occurred in any of the accessory groups, and the origin return operation is performed. Continue production of character products.

When 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to any of the accessory groups, it is determined that an irreversible failure has occurred in the accessory group. In this case, the flag is set to 1 and the process of stopping the recovery operation is stopped for the accessory belonging to the accessory group in which the unrecoverable failure has occurred. As a result, it is possible to prevent useless power consumption due to an unreasonable operation of the motor and failure of the accessory by repeatedly performing the returning operation even though the recovery is impossible.

Here, the accessory may be an accessory that performs a performance operation by operating a member, but in addition to the operation of the member, in addition to the operation by providing a light emitting member on the member of the accessory. It is also possible to perform an effect by emitting light, or to form an accessory itself with a semi-transparent member, and use a light emitting member such as an LED provided inside the accessory to cause the accessory itself to emit light. is there.

Here, in the case where the drive signal for driving the accessory and the light emission signal for emitting the LED for decorating the accessory are set as separate systems and both can be independently controlled, an unrecoverable failure occurs. For an accessory belonging to the accessory group, the returning operation is stopped to stop the operation, but even if the operation of the accessory is stopped, the light emitting member provided on the accessory or the accessory The light emission control for causing itself to emit light can be performed without affecting the operation interference or the like of the accessory, and thus can be continuously performed. At this time, the effect control that should be originally performed may be performed. As a result, even for an accessory belonging to an accessory group in which an unrecoverable failure has occurred, it is possible to continue the effect to some extent by continuing the light emission control.

As another method, for an accessory belonging to an accessory group in which an irreversible failure has occurred, the light-emitting member provided on the accessory or the accessory itself is made to emit light while the operation of the accessory is stopped. In the light emission control, instead of the effect control that should be originally performed, it is possible to perform the light emission control according to the occurrence location of the unrecoverable obstacle, the type of the obstacle, and the like. This makes it possible to grasp the location of the failure and the type of failure according to the light emission mode of the stopped accessory.

Then, the accessory operation control is performed as usual for the accessory group having the flag 0, that is, for the accessory belonging to the accessory group in which the unrecoverable failure has not occurred. If a part of the character fails, and the control of the motion of the whole character is stopped, the motion of the character is completely stopped, which may reduce the player's interest. By leaving the characters belonging to the character group in which the failure has occurred as it is, by driving the character group of the character group that does not physically interfere with the character of the non-recoverable character group, Compared with the case where the accessory operation is completely stopped, it is possible to perform the accessory operation control which enhances the interest of the player.

Regarding the notification of the operation abnormality of the movable accessory, as described above, when the movable accessory fails (not only the failure of the movable accessory itself, but also the wiring connected to control the movable accessory is disconnected. (Including cases etc.)) As an example of notification when the movable accessory is out of order, there is a method of displaying, for example, "I am out of role" on the effect display device 1600. Further, as described later, when a plurality of abnormalities such as a connector abnormality and an operation abnormality of a movable accessory are detected, each of the detected plurality of abnormalities can be displayed. It is also possible to display the abnormalities in descending order of importance.

To detect that a movable accessory has failed and cannot recover, a count is performed when photo detection is not possible even if the accessory correction operation is performed to move it to the origin, and then retry several times. To do. Even if the accessory correction operation is performed a predetermined number of times (five times as an example), if the photo detection is still not possible, it is determined that the state cannot be restored, and the notification is started when the state cannot be restored.
In addition, in the notification of the failure of the movable accessory, not only the notification by the display on the effect display device 1600, but also the notification by sound may be performed. Further, as the notification method, notification by display, notification by sound, and notification by combination of both may be mixed. As a method of selecting those notification methods, a method of combining sound and display depending on the type of failure. Etc. may be changed. Further, a vibration speaker, which will be described later, may be used to notify by vibration. For example, when a plurality of abnormalities are detected, it is possible to set such that abnormalities of high importance are notified by the display on the effect display device 1600 and abnormalities of low importance are notified by sound.

In such an embodiment, it is not preferable that the notification by the display or the notification by the sound is performed more than necessary during the game in which the game is being played. Therefore, regarding the notification of the failure of the movable accessory, it is preferable that only the notification by the display is given during the game, or the volume is reduced even if the notification is by the sound.
Further, in this case, it is not necessary to consider the surrounding players and the like before the opening of the hall business which is not in play. Therefore, for the purpose of notifying people in the hall, it is programmed and set in advance so that the operation abnormality of the movable accessory can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and at that time, both the display and the sound are used to make it easy to understand. You may make it known to the person related to the hall. In this way, it is advisable to set the notification form also for that period.

There are various types of halls, such as large stores where hundreds of stands are installed, and small stores where the number of stands is small. In particular, in a large-scale store with a large number of people, where the number of persons involved in the hall is small, it may not be possible to check the accessory correction operation one by one for all the stands. Even in such a case, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a failure in a more understandable manner by setting the display and sound so that the person in charge of the hall can be easily notified as described above. Then, when it is found that a malfunction has occurred in the movable accessory, it is possible for the person concerned in the hall to re-turn on the power or repair the repair, so that the failure can be treated. ..

In addition, like the inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibration speaker during the RAM clear notification period described above, it is also possible to execute the accessory correction operation upon receiving the RAM clear processing and the RAM clear notification command. Is.

Further, a movable accessory provided in the lower part of the game machine (for example, a popup accessory of the accessory group 05) does not return to the origin due to a foreign object such as the game ball B or dust being caught. If the vibration is detected, the vibration speaker 354 may generate a vibration that may be transmitted to the movable accessory, and the control means may execute the origin position restoration processing for prompting the restoration of the movable accessory to the origin position. Good.

[Sound control by automatic channel system]
Next, a description will be given later of automatic channel sound control, which is a part of the sound data creation processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 16 ms). Therefore, the automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, the background will be briefly described.

In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene in accordance with the progress of the game, so as to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach is expected to improve the expectations of the player, some reach outputs various sounds depending on its type, and some does not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound corresponds to each predetermined preset. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be played is played. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to achieve various sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of top center speakers 462, respectively, for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channels to realize various sound effects and enhancing the interest of the player. Also, each channel is dynamically assigned and managed for each sound to be output from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, while the number of combinations of the sounds to be output is each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority order (sound output control means). .. The details will be described below.

[Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIG. 172(A) and FIG. 172(B) each show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. FIG. 172(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel system, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 172(B) shows an example of allocation of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is pre-assigned to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, regarding the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural.

The "notification sound 1" to "button press sound" shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the reproduction start sound until the reproduction end. As a channel allocation method, a reproduction channel and a sound are exclusively allocated as a pair so that the sound is not overwritten. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound that has started to be reproduced is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction to be muted. As a channel allocation method, the same channel is allocated so that the reproduction timing is not incurred as much as possible.

In sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. With regard to sounds that are disturbed when overwritten, independent channels are assigned, or sounds whose playback timings do not overlap are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 173 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definition of playback channel number, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting is managed for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted. When a sensor such as the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects an abnormality due to a connector abnormality or the like, the sound control of the category “abnormality notification sound” and the sound name “sensor abnormality detection” is performed.

In addition, even when the abnormality of the initial position detection sensor (photosensor) that detects the initial position (origin position) of the movable accessory is detected, that is, when the operation abnormality of the movable accessory is detected, the category “abnormality notification sound” is detected. , And the sound name “sensor abnormality detection” is controlled.
When it is desired to distinguish the abnormality of the connector and the operation abnormality of the movable accessory from each other, for example, in FIG. 173, ch02 is currently assigned as the sound name “sensor abnormality detection”. A dedicated channel may be provided as a fixed channel by additionally allocating ch03 for detecting an abnormality of the initial position detection sensor when an operation abnormality is detected. At this time, it is preferable to assign the abnormality detection to the fixed channel when the fixed channel and the automatic channel are used together in order to reliably notify the abnormality detection.

Further, when different abnormalities are overlapped when the abnormalities are distinguished from each other, the importance of the abnormal type may be determined in advance. For example, if settings are made in advance such that the importance decreases in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and accessory failure, and if these abnormalities occur in duplicate, the importance is high and the notification is given with the highest priority. A notification sound (“RAM has been cleared”) specifying the RAM clear that must be performed may be notified.

In this case, of the abnormalities that have occurred in duplicate, for abnormalities of high importance, the importance of notification is higher than for abnormalities of low importance, so for abnormalities of low importance, do not notify immediately, After the occurrence of an abnormality is memorized and the abnormality of high importance is resolved, or after a lapse of a predetermined period after the notification of the abnormality of high importance is started, the memorized abnormality of low importance is stored. It is also possible to give a notification sound specifying "(magnetically detected" or "feature failure") until the abnormality is resolved or for a predetermined period.

When duplicate anomalies occur and alerts are sequentially issued, alerts are issued in the order of high importance, and after the alerts for anomalies of high importance are completed, the alert of the next highest importance is given. Although the notification may be performed sequentially as described above, the notification period of the alarm sound of the less important abnormality is set to be long, and the importance of the alarm is low together with the notification sound that identifies the abnormality of high importance when the abnormality occurs. While announcing an abnormal notification sound, the volume of the notification sound of high importance is set high and the volume of the notification sound of low importance is set low so that the notification sound of high importance sounds better at first. Then, at the end of the notification period of the abnormality of high importance, the volume is increased so that the notification sound for identifying the abnormality of low importance can be heard well, until the abnormality is resolved, or until the predetermined It is also possible to notify the period.

In addition, if the timing of occurrence of an abnormality is different, for example, magnetism was detected while notifying that the accessory was out of order ("It is an accessory failure") due to the failure of the accessory. Therefore, in the case of notifying that the magnetism is detected (“Magnetism is detected”), the order of notifying is switched based on the type of abnormality as described above.
In this case, the notification mode is switched from "abnormality of accessory" to "magnetism detected". Then, when the abnormality due to magnetism is resolved, the malfunction of the accessory is notified again.

Regarding the type of abnormality, the importance is set to be low in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and accessory abnormality according to the importance. For other abnormalities, it is possible to appropriately set the order of importance according to each abnormality.
As for the mode of notification, it is preferable to notify in any mode by sound, display, or a combination of sound and display. For example, in the above-mentioned example, while announcing by voice, "Abnormality of accessory character" is displayed on the display device, and when the abnormality due to magnetism is resolved, the display is erased and the accessory character is again displayed. The failure is announced by voice. With the sound, the sound and the display, and the like, the speaker or the display device used for the presentation is used, and the notification mode is switched according to the situation. Especially with regard to display devices, in recent years, a plurality of small liquid crystals have been used for performance as accessory devices, but the abnormal condition is displayed for the main display device that displays the abnormal situation on the small display device and displays the lottery symbols. It is advisable not to display it so as not to hinder the game as much as possible.

The left-right pan initial value is the initial position of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). Represents. Dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction creates a difference in the volume output individually from the upper left speaker and upper right speaker, and localizes the sound image in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. Can be done. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speaker of the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 outputs, and when set to “0x80”, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are output. The volume difference output individually from and becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, if it is set to "0xff", it indicates that only the right speaker outputs.

The upper and lower pan initial values represent, for example, the sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the speakers above and below the main frame speaker 622. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that only a pair of upper speakers output, and when set to "0x80", for example, the difference in volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers formed by these combinations is It becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if "0xff" is set, it indicates that only the main body frame speaker 622, which is the lower speaker, outputs.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xff”, for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. Is displayed. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 174 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound and the reproduced channel. The time axis which is the horizontal axis shows the game state, and as the game state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit medium" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority order, and represents that the (reproduction) priority order increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 175(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 175(B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 175(C) says that each sound cannot be reproduced. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 175(A) to 175(C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 175(A), as the gaming state along the time axis that is the horizontal axis, in the order of "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 175(A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 of FIG. 175(C), during the reproduction time of the "first half notice A" as a new sound, the start mouth winning (shown as "holding" 172) (corresponding to "winning prize"), as shown in FIG. 172(B), the "reserved winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A". The reproduced sound of "" is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the "first half notice A" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 175(A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 of FIG. 175(C), as a new sound, during the reproduction time of “Full screen notice”, the starting mouth prize (“Hold in the figure” is shown. 172), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen notice", as shown in FIG. 172(B). The reproduction sound of "" is overwritten by the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[Sound control by automatic channel system]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 176(A) and FIG. 176(B) each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 176(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. With the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, the channel classification being an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated according to a rule described later (above-mentioned). "Equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

In the sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the fixed channel system described above. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 176(B) shows an example of allocation of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel system, as shown in the figure, each sound is individually assigned a priority order. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel requires one channel when outputting in monaural. Become.

The "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure must not be muted in the middle of the reproduction start sound until the reproduction end. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound that has started to be reproduced is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction to be muted.

In sound control by the automatic channel system, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce the sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority order (priority) for designating a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if the sound is defined in the AUTO group, and if an empty channel (unused channel) exists in the specified AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced.

If there is no free channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all the channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as the sound itself being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or is not the same as the sound itself being reproduced.

FIG. 177 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel system. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, for each sound category and sound name, a reproduction channel number such as sound control by the fixed channel which has already been described, a left/right pan initial value, a top/bottom pan initial value, a volume initial value, Instead of sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier for specifying an AUTO group and priority (also called "playback priority"), left/right pan initial value, top/bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents in which AUTO group among a plurality of AUTO groups each sound exists. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when the sounds are simultaneously reproduced. This priority order indicates that the higher the numerical value, the sound that should be preferentially reproduced, while the smaller the numerical value, the sound that should be reproduced without priority. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, the notification sounds whose priority is “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”). , Sound effects with priority “20” (“big hit confirmation sound” and “button press sound”), BGM with priority “15” (such as “normal BGM”), priority “10”. Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with priority "05" ("first half notice sound effect" to "second half notice sound effect"), pending winning sound with priority "01" I am trying. As a result, when there is no vacant channel, for example, when trying to reproduce the notification sound, it is not necessary to reproduce using the predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the reserved winning sound) ), the notification sound is preferentially reproduced using the channel that is reproducing.

As described above, the left/right pan initial value is the sound from the left and right speakers that is a combination of the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). Represents the initial position of sound image localization. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (top center speaker 462 and topside speaker 464) of the top center speaker 462 and the topside speaker 464 outputs the sound, and if "0x80" is set, for example. , The volume difference output individually from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0xff", it indicates that only the right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) outputs the sound.

Further, as already described, the upper and lower pan initial values represent, for example, the sound image localization initial positions of the sounds by the top and bottom speakers of the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the main body frame speaker 622. Dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction creates a difference in the volume individually output from the upper and lower speakers, and localizes the sound image in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. Can be done. The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to “0x80”, for example, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Is 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if "0xff" is set, it indicates that only the main body frame speaker 622, which is the lower speaker, outputs.

Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xff”. In addition, “1” (0x1ff for 0xff if 0xff is set at the third byte ) Is set, it is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume adjusting devices equipped in the gaming machine, and it is always played at the volume set by the initial value. It represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set for each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect” are set. "1" is set for each "Sound". With such seek points, it is possible to perform registration of sounds in excess of the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source.

The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. Is displayed. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 178 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the priority order. The time axis which is the horizontal axis shows the game state, and as the game state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit medium" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority order, and represents that the (reproduction) priority order increases from bottom to top.

178(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 178(B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In these FIGS. 178(A) and 178(B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 178(A), as a game state along the time axis that is the horizontal axis in order, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and " It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "big hit".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 179(A), as shown in FIG. 179(B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from reproduction channel 00 to 01 from beginning to end ( Equivalent to range A). Here, when the player tries to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound because the starting mouth winning (corresponding to the "reserved winning" shown in the figure) is present, the reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this hold prize sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any of the sounds being reproduced is not overwritten by the hold prize sound (corresponding to "hold sound reproduction" in the drawing), and other Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 179(A), as shown in FIG. 179(B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from reproduction channels 00 to 01 all the time ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, when the player tries to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound because there is a start winning (corresponding to the "reserved winning" shown in the figure), the reproduction channels 04 to 05 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , The sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to “reproduction of reserved sound” in the figure), and the output of all other types of sound continues.

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 179(A), a notification sound (corresponding to "notification 2 occurrence" shown in the figure) is generated after that, so that a notification sound with the highest priority of "25" (a new sound) ( When an attempt is made to reproduce "Notification 2" in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 179(B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to "notification sound 2" in the figure) is Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the pending winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

FIG. 180 shows an example of the automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is, as work names, set reservation flags, requested sound numbers, playing sound numbers, automatic allocation groups, priority at automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a work for work and a work for pan control, and has respective information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag is a value other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if "-1" is stopped and is other than "-1". The playing sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound being played, unless "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly assigned when it is “0”, while the channel is automatically assigned when it is “1” (“sound control by automatic channel method” described later). Equivalent to). Here, the automatic allocation group indicates, for example, "1" indicates the AUTO group 1, and "2" indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel system described later.

The elapsed time from registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with "0" at the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound. It should be noted that the elapsed time from the registration corresponds to the number of the sounds currently being reproduced when a new sound is reproduced in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-described left and right pan and upper and lower pan setting values.

FIG. 181 shows an example of empty channel search processing when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. In FIG. 181, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

When the production control program receives a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1100), the production control program confirms the automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102). If the automatic allocation group is "0", the fixed allocation is performed. Then, the reproduction of a new sound is started on the designated channel.

On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation is automatic allocation and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106). ..

When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (monaural) channel (1 channel) (step S1108), and if it exists, the vacant (monaural) channel. ) While the reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel (step S1109), if it does not exist, a reproduction sound of the same priority as or lower than the priority of the new sound is reproduced in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110).

The production control program ends the process when there is no channel of the reproduced sound which is the same as or lower than the priority order of the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, while it exists when there is such a channel. Determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112).

When there are a plurality of relevant channels, the production control program is playing a sound with the longest playback time from registration among the relevant channels based on the elapsed time from the above-mentioned registration. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114). On the other hand, when the corresponding channels do not exist and there is one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel satisfying the desired condition (step S1116).

On the other hand, in step S1106 described above, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it is determined whether there is a free (stereo) channel (two channels) (step S1120). When the production control program determines that an empty channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition and starts the reproduction of the new sound (step S1122).

On the other hand, when the production control program determines that there is no empty channel, it determines whether or not there is a priority equal to or lower than the priority of the new sound in the (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced (step (S1124), if it does not exist, the process is terminated, so that the sound being reproduced is not overwritten with the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, the effect control program, if present, determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126).

The production control program starts the output of the new sound on the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the above-mentioned operation is performed when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel whose reproduction time from the registration is the longest (step S1130).

As described above, the effect control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually understandable manner.

FIG. 182(A) and FIG. 182(B) to FIG. 185(A) and FIG. 185(B) respectively show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 182(A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the normal BGM whose priority is 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 182(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice _A whose priority is 05, and reproduces channels 02 to 03. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a playback request for the button press sound having a priority of 20, and sets it to playback channels 04 to 05. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the button pressing sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice _B whose priority is 05, and reproduces channel 06. Since there is a space in ~07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06-07.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the big hit confirmation sound having the priority of 20, and sets the reproduction channels 08 to 09. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the big hit confirmation sound is started in stereo by using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_C whose priority is 05, and then reproduces the channel 10. Since there is a vacancy in ~11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the reserved winning sound having a priority order of 01, and assigns it to the reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the reproduction request of the notification sound 3 having the priority order of 25, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the reproduction channels. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo by using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

FIG. 186(A) and FIG. 186(B) to FIG. 189(A) and FIG. 189(B) respectively show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 186(A), the production control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a reproduction request for the reach BGM having the priority of 15, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 186(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the notification sound 1 having the priority of 25 is generated, and the reproduction channels 02 to 03 are empty. Since they exist, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 187(A), is triggered by the reproduction request of the full-screen warning sound having the priority order of 10, and the vacant channel. Is performed and there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen notice sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a reproduction request for the notification sound 1 having the priority order of 25, and then displays in FIG. 187(A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure), reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the notification sound 3 having the priority order of 25 is generated, and reproduce channels 04 to 05 ( Since there is an empty space (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure), reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request for reproduction of the accessory notice sound whose priority is 10, and reproduces channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a free space (corresponding to "non-reproduction (free space)" in the figure), the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo by using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the notification sound 2 having the priority of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction by the reproduction channels 14 to 15 which reproduces the "holding winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound in stereo is started.

By doing this, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel with a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output with a higher priority is output. Each sound will be played on the playback channel found by the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the empty channels can be effectively utilized as described above, but also each channel including the empty channels can be used to output as many sounds as planned to be output. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, various sound effects can be realized and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

FIG. 190(A) and FIG. 190(B)-FIG. 191(A) and FIG. 191(B) respectively show an example of the specific contents of the free channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 190(A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the left symbol stop sound whose priority is 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 190(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to play the right symbol stop sound whose priority is 15 and creates an empty channel in the playing channels 00-01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the middle symbol stop sound having the priority of 15, and reproduce channels 00 to 01. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a reproduction request for the jackpot BGM whose priority is 15 and creates an empty channel in the reproduction channels 00-01. Therefore, the reproduction of the big hit BGM in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Note that, when the reproduction replacement of the sound according to the priority order occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that you can do so.

[Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiments, the description has been made by way of example in which the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed by using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels, but the invention is not limited to this, and the sound control by the fixed channel described above The sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

FIGS. 192(A) to 192(F) are diagrams each showing a variation example of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of channel systems or a combination thereof.

FIG. 192(A) shows an example of channel allocation in the sound control by the fixed channel system for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 192(B) shows this. It corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel allocation in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. The sound control by assigning these two channels has already been described, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192C shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used and channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of reproduction channels to perform sound control by the automatic channel system (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). .. FIG. 192(D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used to allocate channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels and perform sound control by the fixed channel method for some reproduction channels. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

FIG. 192(E) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used to perform channel assignment for the maximum number of reproduction channels and some of the reproduction channels are subjected to the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 192E will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG. 192.

FIG. 192(F) shows that, using one automatic channel group, the maximum number of reproduction channels is assigned to channels to perform sound control by the automatic channel system, and some of the reproduction channels are reproduced by the fixed channel system. The control is performed, but differs from the above example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 192(F) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG. 192.

As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting the automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped into one group, empty channels are allocated or channels being output are swapped based on a pre-specified standard. Sound can be output only by determining the priority order of. Therefore, unlike conventional control methods that specify a channel and output sound, channel management is not required, so control related to sound output can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved. Becomes

Further, by adopting the automatic channel system, it is possible to minimize the number of channels, and for example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, which reduces the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel system]
Next, details of another mode of the sound control method described above will be described. In the sound control method described above, by dynamically changing the sound allocation to each channel as the automatic channel method, it was possible to effectively utilize the empty channels to reproduce many sounds. In recent diversified game machines, hundreds or thousands of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate management of sound sources.

In addition, by outputting a plurality of sounds in an overlapping manner, it is possible to perform a preliminary announcement effect in a duplicated manner and to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192(C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and the plurality of sounds and the reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that the sounds are reliably output in duplicate. can do. Moreover, there is an advantage that the management becomes easy by dividing the sound into types.

Further, the sound includes a sound that should be output prior to the effect sound, such as an informative sound, and a sound that is continuously output, such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192(D), the sound that is preferentially output or the sound that is always output is output by the fixed channel system, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start winning or the variable display is output. Output in the automatic channel system.

With the above-described configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the empty channels by the automatic channel system and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel system. In addition, since it is possible to classify by the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, effect data management becomes easy.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 192(E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIG. 192(C) and FIG. 192(D), and has the advantages of each method. The sound control method shown in FIG. 192(E) will be specifically described below.

[15-1. Sound control with fixed channel system and multiple automatic channel systems mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the example described above, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by the fixed channel system and a channel for reproducing sound by the automatic channel system. .. The channels that reproduce sounds by the automatic channel system are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Play channel configuration]
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in the sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of this embodiment, 32 channels are used, and each channel is assigned a unique identifier (channel number).

The channel configuration table includes "automatic allocation" indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for channel numbers, "section" indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" of each channel. It should be noted that “Remark” is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 193, the configuration of each channel of this embodiment is such that channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

The channels of the automatic channel system with the channel numbers 8 to 19 are "AUTO group 1", and the channels of the automatic channel system with the channel numbers 24 to 29 are "AUTO group 2".

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment can output sound in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) channels are used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

A channel having a channel number of 0 (hereinafter, referred to as "channel 0", and each channel is represented by a "channel number" that is the number of the "channel" channel + 1) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the game machine is started. Channel 1 is a channel that pairs with channel 0 when a sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel that pairs with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channels 4 and 5 are channels used to output BGM, and channels 6 and 7 are channels paired with channels 5 and 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

In addition, in the present embodiment, not only the stereo output is performed, but also a plurality of sounds are simultaneously output to improve the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be simultaneously output. Further, as will be described later, since it is possible to output BGM on channel 20 (and channel 21) as well, it is possible to simultaneously output four BGMs using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). Has become.

While the game machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is the fixed channel system and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with the case of reproducing the sound only by the automatic channel system, while preventing the generation of the empty channel.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output when the notice effect is executed. In the notice production, the sound selected by the lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for the sound output each time based on the predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel system.

In the present embodiment, unlike the example described above, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound at the time of the notice production is AUTO group 1.

When outputting a sound when the notice effect is executed, the peripheral control MPU first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched and, in principle, consecutive channels are set as output channels. At this time, if an empty channel exists, it is set to output the designated sound from the empty channel. On the other hand, when there is no vacant channel, the channel in use is released and a new sound is output or the output of the designated sound is stopped based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

The channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that forms a pair with the channel 20 during stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when BGM is output by superimposing four sounds or when a specific effect sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the notice effect output by the automatic channel method.

Like the channels 20 and 21, the channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. The channel 23 is a channel paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the hold tone is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, a sound output regardless of the lottery result at the time of winning the start prize, or a sound to be preferentially output when the big hit is determined. It should be noted that sounds and the like based on the lottery result at the time of winning the start prize are output from channels 24 to 29 as described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel system is applied. On channels 24 to 29, the sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of winning the start prize and the sound output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation are reproduced. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 by the fixed channel method, it is possible to reliably output the sound when the big hit is confirmed, even if there are no empty channels in the channels 24 to 29, and attract the attention of the player. You can

The channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are the channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. In addition, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel system in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is assigned when the output is constantly continued like BGM or when it is necessary to reliably output like the abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sound output flexibly according to the game state, etc., it is prevented that the sound is not output even if there are empty channels, and a finite number of channels are set. It can be used effectively.

[Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for a vacant channel for sound source control according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a free channel search process when the control of outputting the sound according to the present embodiment is executed. Although FIG. 181 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, the difference is that FIG. 194 has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing will be omitted.

In the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 194, in the processing of steps S1108 and S1120, when the new sound is the automatic channel method, it is determined whether or not there is an empty channel in the channels of the same group. That is, if channels of different groups are vacant but there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the results of steps S1108 and S1120 will be “No”.

Further, in the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 194, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step S1118, step S1132). Hereinafter, the selection condition of the channel for stopping the sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. 195. It should be noted that the production in which the sound output is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for exchanging sound outputs (stopping reproduction of a sound or releasing a sound) when a channel is not empty at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. .. As a concrete selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and the sound of higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, a reproduction time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, a volume size, a change amount of a sound being reproduced, and the like, and further, a sound reproduction time at the time of channel selection, It also includes the remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the reproduction time (elapsed time) from the start of reproduction. For example, as shown in steps S1114 and S1130 of FIG. 181, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel whose elapsed time is long after the reproduction is started, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed is ended, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a new effect has been executed.

The condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, since an effect having a longer reproduction time may have a higher expectation, an effect having a shorter reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, the effect on the subsequently executed effects may be minimized by stopping the effect having a long reproduction time. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total reproduction time, not on the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

The condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of the effect having a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. In addition, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress rate of the effect. By setting the conditions in this way, it is possible to stop the sound output at the initial stage or the final stage of the effect.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, since an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output can be an effect with a higher degree of importance, a channel with a low volume in the output sound is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel with a large volume of the output sound may be preferentially selected to let the player recognize that a new effect will be executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on the change in the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that the effect in which the sound that is faded in or faded out is output can be a more important effect, and a channel with a small volume change amount is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the sound control load may be reduced by preferentially selecting a channel having a large volume change.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in the sound image localization position (panpot). For example, by changing the output of the left and right sound of the stereo speakers to produce a more three-dimensional sound effect, it is possible to create a channel with less change in the dynamic sound image localization position, as a more important one. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel in which the dynamic sound image localization position is largely changed to reduce the sound control load.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on a note number (index). For example, a large (small) tone number is selected. At this time, the priority may be associated with the sound number.

Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected, assuming that the production of a stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since only one channel of monaural sound is used, if the number of empty channels is insufficient even if the channels that output monaural sound are opened, select the channels that output stereo sound to increase the number of empty channels. You may

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not the volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set to be unable to adjust the volume may be more important, or an effect set to be able to adjust the volume may be more important.

In addition to the conditions shown above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning a unique priority order to all sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority order.

In the table shown in FIG. 195, conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied independently or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition and a channel that satisfies more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[Volume control]
Next, an example will be described in which control is performed to assign a channel based on the priority assigned to a sound to be newly output. Here, an example in which three types of advance notices (first-half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 196 is a timing chart showing an example of effects for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of the priority order of the sound effects in the effect example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 196, the first half notice_A is generated when a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display was started. At this time, an instruction to operate the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first-half notice C occurs while the first-half notice_A and the first-half notice_B are being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 145, the priority of the first-half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first-half notice_B and the first-half notice_C, when the notice productions of lower priority are duplicated in the same group, the volume is changed based on the control volume value. Will be reduced.

Explaining the contents of each notice, the first-half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and a sound effect is output in stereo from channels 08 and 09 while the character appears on the display screen.

The first half notice_B is an effect that is executed by operating the effect button, and the button pressing sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice_B is started, and the stereo effect is obtained from channels 10 and 11. Sound is output.

The first half notice_C is output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and the sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically other notice effects and BGM are temporarily. Is muted (blackout effect). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of the sound effects other than the first half notice_C is restarted.

Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing an example of volume changes of sound effects in the first half variation of the present embodiment, (A) shows output timing of effect sound effects, and (B) shows volume change of effect sound effects. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis in (B) represents the volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at time t1. At this time, the effect sound of the first-half notice_A is output with the preset volume V_A.

After that, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect effect sound of the first half notice _B is output with the volume V_B. Since the priority of the first-half notice_B is higher than that of the first-half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

It should be noted that if the priority of the notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the notice effect being executed, the volume does not have to be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects being output at the same time. You don't have to turn down the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

Further, when the first-half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen goes dark until time t5, and the sound effects other than the first-half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

In addition, the effect sound effects of the first-half notice _A and the first-half notice _B, which have been muted at time t3, are restarted to be output at time t5. Originally, the button press sound is output until time t4, but since t5>t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

After that, in the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B, the effect is continued until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t7, the first half notice_B ends, and the first half of the change ends.

While the effect sound effect is muted, the effect sound effect may be output with the volume set to 0, or the effect sound effect may be stopped. When setting the volume to 0, the volume (sub-volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire effect sound effect may be set to 0 to output the sound effect of the first half notice_C. May be bypassed and output so as not to be influenced by the control by the main volume. Further, even in a state where the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, the sound effect, the warning sound, and the notification sound of higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, the volume of the sound being played on all channels is not lowered, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel in the same channel system (fixed channel system or automatic channel system) may be lowered. Also, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[effect]
With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output the sound with the higher priority. The sound with high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for sure transmission to the player or an employee in the game hall, or the expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit is high. Sound effect for enhancing the sense of expectation, or a sound effect having a high staging effect and capable of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily manage the effect data regarding the effect sound by classifying each channel used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups. As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency such as suppressing the occurrence of bugs due to systematic test execution. In addition, by allowing a stable game, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs the sound effect of the notice effect and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs the hold-related sound effect. The number of sound effects of the notice effect is huge compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be simultaneously reproduced in an overlapping manner. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, output of effect sound effects exceeding the number of allocated channels may be required by, for example, executing a preview of the fluctuation and a pre-reading warning of the pending fluctuation. In such a case, in the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1, the effect sound having a lower priority is output while being replaced with the effect sound having a higher priority, whereby the interest of the game can be maximized. ..

Furthermore, it is desirable that the change of the hold display of the variable display and the effect for notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound effect can greatly enhance the player's expectation and be surely executed. .. In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the case of the notice effect in the variable display, the number of effect sound effects that are simultaneously output does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, so the effect effect sound output is stopped. It is less likely to be done. Further, even in the case of being stopped, the output of the effect sound effect having a lower priority is only stopped. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by surely executing the production which is highly effective in increasing the player's expectation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the channels to which the automatic channel system is applied and the channels to which the fixed channel system is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are effectively used by searching for empty channels, and priority effects are set to output the effects and sounds of high importance. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case where the sound is continuously output like BGM, or the case where the sound is preferentially output to notify a failure or fraud of a gaming machine. In this way, by applying a channel system suitable for the characteristics and application of the sound, each channel can be effectively used, and moreover, appropriate control can be performed according to the output condition of the sound. For example, in the control of outputting the BGM, the sound may be output to the pre-allocated channel regardless of the game state, and in the control of outputting the alarm sound, the designated channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. You can output the sound directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to maximize the use of the vacant channels and preferentially output the sound having a high effect of effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect having a high priority. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the effect with the lower priority executed earlier is still continuing after the effect with the higher priority is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, by stopping the other effects and executing the specific effect alone, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

Here, the sound source IC used for producing the sound effect and the BGM is also used for driving the vibration speaker 354 described above. By giving sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the effect operation unit 301 is vibrated.

The purpose of providing sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 is to vibrate the effect operation unit 301. Therefore, the channel may be set each time the effect operation of the effect operation unit 301 appears. In order to avoid confusion in nature with sound information such as sound effects and BGM, which are the same sound information, they are fixed channels and are assigned to channels dedicated to the vibration speaker.

Further, as the sound information of the sound ROM to be referred to, as described above, it is a sine wave of 40 Hz±2 Hz, and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (swept) 8 times per 1 cycle in units of 1 Hz. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sound ROM as sound information to be input again after 1 second.
Furthermore, by controlling the volume as described above, the volume of a high-priority effect is increased and emphasized, but the intensity of vibration is the same as the volume of 40 Hz±2 Hz. By increasing or decreasing the amplitude of the sine wave of, the vibration is gradually strengthened or weakened, and the volume of the sound is adjusted. I also use it.

Although the sound source IC has been expressed as a single device having only that function, a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600 in the effect display control unit is a device having a function equivalent to the sound source IC. Even in such a case, vibration can be controlled as long as the similar sound control described above can be performed. In such a case, the sound ROM and the image ROM may be hybridized, or the same device may be configured to store information used in advance in advance. Further, the CPU and the control ROM for controlling these may be configured by the same device.

[15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control system described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel system is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel system is set are preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel system is set. A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels the fixed channel system are set to are variable will be described.

[Example of production]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there may be a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of areas (for example, 9 divisions), and different scenes are displayed on the respective divided screens. At that time, it is possible to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing an example of the screen configuration of the effect in the modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 199 is a notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the reach occurs.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and an effect of displaying different scenes on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, one of the scenes is selected, and the effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is simultaneously output. The scene may be selected by lottery or may be selected by the player.

The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. The default channel allocation is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously output up to four types (8 channels) of BGM. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output 9 types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, channels for outputting BGM are reassigned and the channel arrangement is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel layout]
FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in the sound source control in the modified example of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration of FIG. 200A is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 193, as described above.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 200(A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 148(B). Specifically, a fixed channel type channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 1 and employing the automatic channel method is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different notice effect is executed during execution of the multi-screen effect.

After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGMs corresponding to each scene are reproduced while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGMs are output with the normal volume, the volume becomes too loud, so the volume is output with the volume being lower than usual. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (second notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. .. In addition, when the player selects a scene, for example, the BGM of the selected scene is changed until another scene is selected by selecting a screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the BGM of the other scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing an example of volume changes of sound effects in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) output timing of effect sound effects, and (B) volume change of each effect sound effects. Indicates.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 201, at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 200(A)) to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 200(B). )) is changed. After the first-half fluctuation ends (time t11), reach occurs and the second-half fluctuation starts. After the change in the second half is started, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 199, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change is output to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 200(B)). At this time, the volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1 is output.

After that, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the BGM volume corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of other BGMs is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 201, scene 5 is selected and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

After the end of the multi-screen effect, the channels outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the BGM output from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a timing required. For example, in the present modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half change.

Further, instead of changing the arrangement of channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the game state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a time saving state, or a background change) changes.

[effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to the “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 192(F)) for performing sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channel for performing sound control by the automatic channel method (see FIG. The number of “variable AUTOch” of 192(F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects can be reproduced depending on the situation. For example, more kinds of notification sounds can be output in a situation where no game is played. It is possible to flexibly cope with the problem by increasing the number of BGMs or sound effects to be reproduced for performance by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

In the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the invention can be applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the same action and effect as those described above.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 10 Outer frame left assembly 11 Outer frame left member 11a Recess 11b Recessed part 11c Cavity 12 Upper left connecting member 12a Horizontal fixing part 12b Upper horizontal fixing Part 12c Lower horizontal fixing part 13 Left lower connecting member 13a Horizontal fixing part 13b Upper horizontal fixing part 13c Lower horizontal fixing part 13d Abutting part 20 Outer frame right assembly 21 Outer frame right member 21a Recess 21b Swelling part 21c Cavity 22 Upper right Connecting member 22a Horizontal fixing part 22b Upper horizontal fixing part 22c Lower horizontal fixing part 23 Right lower connecting member 23a Horizontal fixing part 23b Upper horizontal fixing part 23c Lower horizontal fixing part 23d Abutting part 24 Upper hook member 24a Mounting part 24b Hooking piece Part 25 Lower hook member 25a Mounting part 25b Locking piece part 25c Insertion port 30 Outer frame upper member 30a Notch 30b Mounting step 40 Outer frame lower assembly 40a Curtain plate inner space 41 Outer frame lower member 41a Notch 41b Recess 42 Curtain plate front member 42a Opening 43 Curtain plate rear member 43a Connection cylinder 43b Rib 44 Ball catching prevention mechanism 44a Placement part 44b First discharge port 44c Second discharge port 44d Standing wall part 44e Upper end protrusion 45 Guide member 50 Outer frame Upper hinge assembly 51 Outer frame Upper hinge member 51a Upper fixing part 51b Front extension part 51c Bearing groove 51d Horizontal fixing part 51e End edge wall part 52 Lock member 52a Lock body 52b Operation piece 52c Elastic part 52d Mounting hole 53 Mounting screw 60 Outer frame lower hinge member 60a Horizontal part 60b Standing part 60c Outer frame lower hinge pin 60d Discharge hole

100 door frame base unit 101 door frame base 101a door window 101b handle mounting seat surface 101c insertion recess 101d cylinder insertion hole 101e ball feeding opening 101f lower plate ball passage opening 101g upper plate ball passage opening 101h glass unit mounting portion 101i slit 101j Through-hole 102 Handle attachment part 102a Cylinder part 102b Flange part 102c Projection 102d Reinforcing rib 103 Speaker duct 103a Cable holder 104 Door frame main relay board 105 Door frame Sub relay board 106 Handle rear relay board 107 Door frame Relay board cover 108 Door Frame rear relay substrate cover 109 Cable cover 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame reinforcing unit 111 Left reinforcing frame 112 Right reinforcing frame 113 Upper reinforcing frame 114 Intermediate reinforcing frame 114a Notch 114b Penetration 115 Cylinder mounting frame 116 Hooking member 120 Door Frame hinge assembly 121 Hinge bracket 121a Mounting piece 121b Projecting piece 122 Door frame upper hinge pin 123 Collar member 124 Lock spring 125 Door frame lower hinge member 125a Mounting piece 125b Projecting piece 126 Door frame lower hinge pin

130 Cylinder Lock 131 Cylinder Main Body 132 Keyhole 133 Rotation Transmission Member

140 ball feeding unit 141 front cover 141a entrance 141b ball outlet 141c slit 141e ball feeding opening 142 rear cover 142a ball hitting supply port 142b mounting recess 143 ball pulling member 143a partition 143b rotating rod 143c 3 d 14 Ball feeding member 144a Blocking portion 144b Ball holding portion 144c Rod portion 145 Ball feeding solenoid 146 Ball feeding operating rod 146a Iron plate 147 Ball feeding crank 147a Engagement portion 147b Shaft portion 147c Transmission portion 148 Malfunction prevention member 148a Upper piece portion 148b Lower piece part 148c Inclined part

150 foul cover unit 150a through ball passageway 150b full ball receiving port 150c foul ball receiving port 150d ball discharging port 150e storage passageway 150f door opening/closing contact part

151 Unit Main Body 152 Lid Member 153 Movable Piece 154 Full Tank Detection Sensor 155 Spring

160 Glass Unit 161a Mounting Piece 161b Locking Piece 161 Glass Frame 162 Glass Plate 163 Glass Unit Mounting Member 163b Projection 163a Base

170 Security cover 171 Main body 172 Rear protruding piece 173 Locking piece

180 Handle unit 181 Handle base 181a Base portion 181b Front end portion 181c Groove portion 182 Handle 182a First protrusion 182b Second protrusion 182c Third protrusion 182d Fourth protrusion 182e Slit 182f Locking protrusion 183 Cover pedestal 183a Handle mounting boss 184 Cover 186 Inner base 187 Shaft member 187a Drive gear part 188 Transmission gear 189 Handle rotation detection sensor 189a Detection shaft 190 Handle return spring 191 Auxiliary spring 192 Handle touch sensor 193 Single button 194 Single button operation sensor

200 Dish Unit 201 Upper Dish 201a Induction Passage 201b Grounding Metal Fitting 202 Lower Dish 202a Lower Dish Sphere Hole 210 Dish Base Unit 211 Dish Unit Base 211a Upper Dish Sphere Supply Port 211b Speaker Port 211c Lower Dish Sphere Supply Port 211d Notch 211e Upper Dish Ball feeding port 211f Mounting protrusion 211g Slider insertion port 211h Handle insertion port 211i Cylinder insertion port 211a Upper plate ball supply port

212 Upper Plate Main Body 212a Performance Operation Unit Mounting Part 213 Mounting Base 213a Insertion Port 213b Through Port 214 Plate Unit Relay Board 220 Ball Lending Operation Unit 221 Base Part 222 Upper Ball Removal Button 223 Ball Lending Operation Base 224 Ball Lending Button 225 Return Button 230 Upper Plate Ball Removal Unit 231 Front Base 232 Front Slider 240 Upper Plate Ball Removal Unit 241 Rear Base 241a Ball Receiving Port 241b Ball Feeding Guideway 241c Ball Removing Guideway 242 Upper Plate Ball Removing Slider 242a Operation Receiving Section 242b Operation Transmission part 243 Spring 244 Rear cover 250 Dish decoration unit 251 Lower dish body 252 Dish unit body 252a Upper side bulging part 252b Lower front decoration part 252c Bottom plate part 252d Lower plate opening 252e Front cutout 252f Bottom cutout 252g Handle insertion hole 252h Cylinder insertion port 252i Performance operation unit mounting part 252h Cylinder insertion port 260 Lower plate ball removal unit 261 Lower plate ball removal base 262 Slider 263 Lower plate ball removal button 264 Spring 265 Lower plate ball removal lid 266 Holding mechanism 270 Plate upper left decoration unit 271 Plate top left decoration 272 Plate top left reflector 273 Plate top left decoration board 275 Plate top right decoration unit 276 Plate top right decoration 277 Plate top right reflector 278 Plate top right decoration board 280 Plate left bottom decoration unit 281 Plate left bottom decoration 282 Plate left bottom reflector 283 Plate left bottom Decorative board 285 Plate lower right decoration unit 286 Plate lower right decoration 287 Plate lower right reflector 288 Plate lower right decoration board

300 Performance Operation Unit 301 Performance Operation Section 302 Rotation Operation Section 303 Press Operation Section 303a Central Press Operation Section 303b Periphery Press Operation Section 310 Performance Operation Section Cover Unit 311 Unit Lower Cover 311a Drain Hole 312 Unit Front Cover 312a Plate Center Top Decorative Body 312b Dish center lower decorative body 313 Dish center upper reflector 314 Dish center upper decorative substrate 315 Dish center lower reflector 316 Dish center lower decorative substrate 320 Operation part base 321 Main body part 322 Flange part 323 Leg part 324 Upper mounting part 325 Gear bearing part 325 Gear Bearing part 330 Performance operation ring 331 Ring mounting base 331a Mounting part 331b Boss part 331c Through hole 332 Rotating base 332a Ring gear 332 Rotating base 332a Ring gear 333 Bushing 334 Ring retaining member 335 Ring outer top cover 335a Outer surface decoration 335b Part 335c outer upper cover mounting part 336 ring outer lower cover 336a outer lower surface part 336b outer lower cover mounting part 337 ring inner cover 337a inner surface part 337b cylinder surface part 337c inner cover mounting part 340 rotary drive unit 341 rotary drive base 342 operation Ring drive motor 343 Drive gear 344 Transmission gear 344a First gear 344b Second gear 345 Transmission detection gear member 345a Gear part 345b Detection piece 346 Gear cover 347 First rotation detection sensor 348 Second rotation detection sensor 349 Sensor cover 350a Ring side gear Part 350b Drive side gear part 352 Rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352a Front decorative substrate 352b Rear decorative substrate 353 Decorative substrate cover 353a Front substrate cover 350 Operation ring transmission gear 350a Ring side gear part 350b Drive side gear part 351 Gear mounting member 352 Rendering Operation ring Decorative board 352i Performance operation unit mounting part 353 Decorative board cover 354 Vibration speaker

360 Production operation button unit 361 Button unit base 361a Base body 361b Leg part 362 Guide shaft 363 Upper base 364 Elevating base 364a Guide hole 364b Central hole 364c Standing wall part 364d Guide pin 365 Elevating spring 366 Central shaft 367 Operation button elevating drive motor 368 Drive gear 369 Driven gear 370 Lifting cam Drive gear member 370a Gear part 370b Connecting part 370c Lifting detecting piece 371 Lifting cam member 371a Cam part 371b First cam 371c Locking part 371d Second cam 371e Third cam 371f Connected part 372 Gear Cover 373 Central button main body 373a Cylindrical portion 373b Bottom portion 373c Guide hole 373d Central opening 373e Press detection piece 373f Guide boss 374 Button spring 375 Central button cover 375a Top plate portion 375b Circular wall portion 376 Central button decorative substrate 377 Peripheral button decorative substrate 378 378a Substrate part 378b Cylindrical part 379 Perimeter decoration lens 380 Perimeter button cover 383b Perimeter pressing operation part 382 Elevation detection sensor 381 Press detection sensor 380 Perimeter button cover 380a Cylindrical part 380b Annular part 390 Operation part Relay board unit 391 Substrate box 392 Operation part Relay board 391a Motor cover part

400 Door Frame Left Side Unit 401 Door Frame Left Side Base 402 Frame Left Side Decorative Board 403 Left Side Reflector 404 Door Frame Left Side Decorative Body 402a Left Side Upper Decorative Board 402b Left Side Lower Decorative Board 403a Through Hole 410 Door Frame Right Side Unit 410a Side window 410b Side window interior decoration 411 Door frame right side base 412 Side window interior decoration member 412a Connection base 413 Side window interior decoration decorative board 414 Inner reflector 415 Right side reflector 415a Through hole 416 Door frame right side outer panel 416a Through hole 417 Door frame right side inner panel 417a Through hole 418 Door frame right side decorative board 418a Right side upper decorative board 418b Right side lower decorative board 419 Door frame right side decorative body

450 Door Frame Top Unit 451 Door Frame Top Base 451a Main Body 451b Front Protrusion 452 Top Top Cover 452a Opening 453 Door Frame Top Decorative Body 454 Door Frame Top Bottom Plate 454a Reinforcing Ribs 454b Central Speaker Port 454c Side Speaker Port 455 Door Frame Top Central decorative board 456 Door frame top left decorative board 457 Door frame top right decorative board 458 Top central reflector 459 Top left reflector 460 Top right reflector 461 Central speaker box 462 Top central speaker 463 Speaker bracket 464 Top side speaker 465 Top bottom cover 466 Bottom Cover frame 467 Door frame top relay board 468 Door frame top top plate

500 main body frame base unit 501 main body frame base 501a base main body 501b game board insertion opening 501c game board mounting portion 501d game board restriction portion 501e launcher mounting portion 501f cylinder insertion opening 501g speaker opening 501h cable mounting recess 501i cable insertion opening 501j Rearward extension part 501k Upper hinge mounting part 501l Lower hinge mounting part

502 Connection cable guide member 502 Connection cable guide member 502a Guide body 502b Frame piece 502c Mounting shaft 502d Through hole 503 Connection cable 504 Binding band 505 Game board lock member 510 Main frame upper hinge member 520 Main frame lower hinge assembly 521 Lower hinge No. 1 One main body 521a Lower hinge hole for outer frame 522 Lower hinge Second main body 522a Lower hinge hole for door frame 522b Restricting piece 530 Main body frame reinforcing frame 531 Left position restricting member 540 Ball launching device 541 Launching base 542 Launching solenoid 543 Hitting hammer 544 Launching Rail 550 Discharge base unit 551 Discharge base 551a Top plate 551b Left side plate 551c Right side plate 551d Back plate upper part 551e Back plate left part 551f Inner plate part 551g Bottom plate part 551h Connecting plate part 551i Back cover mounting part 551j Ball tank 552a Mounting portion 552b Mounting portion 552c Mounting portion 552d Mounting portion 552e Mounting portion 553 Tank rail 554 First rail cover 555 Second rail cover 556 Ball rectifying member 557 Ball stopping member 558 External terminal board 558a Case portion 559 Earth circuit board 560 Discharge unit 570 Ball guide unit 570a Guide passage 571 Guide unit base 572 Guide passage front lid 573 Moving piece member 574 Ball cutting detection sensor 580 Discharge device 560 Discharge unit 580 Discharge device 580a Discharge passage 580a Discharge device main body 581a Guide wall 582 Discharging device rear lid 582a Rear lid side guide wall 583 Discharging device front lid 584 Dispensing motor 585 Drive gear 586 First transmission gear 587 Second transmission gear 588a Dispensing gear 588b Detection piece 588 Dispensing gear member 589 Dispensing blade 589a Blade piece 589b Sphere accommodating portion 590 Blade rotation detection sensor 591 Dispensing detection sensor 592 Ball removal movable piece 593 Ball removal lever ER1, ER2 Earth resistance


600 Upper full ball path unit 600a Upper payout ball receiving passage 600b Upper ball storage passage 600c Upper normal payout passage 600d Upper full payout passage 600e Upper full ball discharge passage 601 Upper full base 601a Back cover mounting part 602 Upper full tank cover 603 Dispensing Device pressing member 610 Lower full ball path unit 610a Lower normal dispensing passage 610b Lower full dispensing passage 610c Lower ball passage 611 Lower full base 612 Lower full cover 613 Dispensing passage opening/closing door 614 Closing spring 613a Operating protrusion

620 Substrate unit 620a Speaker unit 620b Base unit 620c Power supply unit 620d Discharge control unit 620e Interface unit 621 Speaker cover 621a Speaker attachment part 621b Space front recess 621c Connection part 621d Through tube 622 Body box speaker 623 Speaker box 623a Enclosure Front base 626 Rear base 627 Ball ejection guide section 628 Discharging ball receiving section 629 Ball discharging port 630 Power supply board 631 Power supply board cover 632 Discharge control board box 633 Discharge control board 634 Board base 635 Interface board 636 Interface board cover 640 Back cover 650 Locking unit

651 Unit base 652 Door frame hook 653 Outer frame hook 654 Transmission cylinder 655 Lock spring 656 Outer frame unlocking lever

1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guiding part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stop part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Out port 1009 Security recess 1010 Cutout 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1121 Through port 1122 Notch

1200 board holder 1201 discharge part 1300 main control unit 1310 main control board 1320 main control board box 1400 function display unit 1401 status indicator 1402 ordinary symbol indicator 1403 ordinary reserved indicator 1404 first special symbol indicator 1405 first special reserved number Display 1406 Second special symbol display 1407 Second special reserved number display 1408 Round display

1500 peripheral control unit 1510 peripheral control board 1511 peripheral control section 1512 performance control section 1520 peripheral control board box

1600 production display device (also called game board side production display device)
1601 Left fixing piece 1602 Right fixing piece

2000 Front Table Unit 2001 General Winning Hole 2002 First Starting Port 2003 Gate Part 2004 Second Starting Port 2005 Big Winning Port 2100 Starting Port Unit 2200 Side Unit

2400 Attacker Unit 2401 Gate Sensor 2402 Second Starting Port Sensor 2403 Big Winning Sensor 2404 Starting Port Solenoid 2405 Attacker Solenoid

2500 Center character 2501 Warp entrance 2502 Warp exit 2503 Stage 2600 Table production unit

3000 Back unit 3001 General winning a prize sensor 3002 First starting sensor 3003 Magnetic sensor

3010 Back Box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid Crystal Mounting Part 3010c Fixing Groove 3010d Notch 3010e Fixing Part 3020 Lock Mechanism 3031 Panel Relay Board (Drive Board in FIG. 169)
3100 Back production unit

4000 detection sensor unit (origin position detection sensor unit in FIG. 169)
4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input section 4163 Voltage output section 4164 Detection circuit section 4165 RTC control section 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Evasion unit 4167 Evasion unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4200 Game ball guide path unit 4510 Evasion unit STR Transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR Contact resistance CON2 connector CON3 connector member CON4 connector member 4504-4506 Connector member 5000 Role group 01
5002 Accessory group 02
5004 Accessory group 03
5006 Accessory group 04
5008 Accessory Group 05
CN11 connector CN12 connector CN13 connector CN14 connector CN15 connector 5591 ground wire 5592 ground wire 5593 ground wire 5594 ground wire 5595 ground wire

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a main body frame and a game board detachable from the main body frame,
An external connection board that is connected to the outside of the gaming machine by wiring is provided in the main frame,
The main body frame is configured to include a base member formed of a transparent material,
When the game board is removed, the external connection board is visible from the front side of the game machine through the base member,
The external connection board has a terminal mounting surface to which the wiring can be connected, and a solder surface on the back surface side of the terminal mounting surface, and the solder surface is visible when viewed through the base member. Is possible,
In a state where the external connection board is visible from the front side of the gaming machine through the base member, a specific board different from the external connection board to which the ground wire for static elimination is connected can also be viewed.
The mounting angle of the external connection board and the mounting angle of the specific board are different, and the external connection board and the specific board are visually recognized at different inclinations when viewed with the game board removed. A gaming machine characterized by.

Images